JP2024031160A - gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase the interest of a game.SOLUTION: In a game machine that includes game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game and performance control means capable of executing a performance related to the game, and can generate a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result, the game control means can generate a first special game state when the result of the game is a first special result, generate a second special game state when the result of the game is a second special result, generate the first special game state when the result of the game in a normal game state is the first special result, generate a first specific game state after the end of the first special game state, and generate the second special game state when the result of the game in the first specific game state is the second special result. The performance control means, as a performance in the first special game state, can perform display in which obtainable game values in the first special game state and obtainable game values in the second special game state are combined.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 49A

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that can generate a specific gaming state (time saving state) (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-221239

However, in the conventional gaming machines, there was room to improve the interest of the games.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

A typical form of the present invention includes a game control means that can control the progress of the game, and a performance control means that can execute a performance related to the game, and when the result of the game is a special result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player, the game control means is capable of generating a first special gaming state when the game has a first special result; A second special gaming state can be generated when a second special result is obtained, and the first special gaming state can be generated when a game in a normal gaming state has the first special result, and the first special gaming state is A first specific gaming state can be generated after the end of the first specific gaming state, and when the game in the first specific gaming state reaches the second special result, the second special gaming state can be generated, and the effect control means is capable of generating the second special gaming state. As a performance in the first special gaming state, it is possible to display a combination of the obtainable gaming value in the first special gaming state and the obtainable gaming value in the second special gaming state.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of the gaming machine seen from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a production control system of a gaming machine. 2 is a flowchart (part 1) showing the procedure of main processing. 12 is a flowchart (part 2) showing the procedure of main processing. 12 is a flowchart (part 3) showing the procedure of main processing. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a gaming microcomputer. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of safety device information initialization processing. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of performance display editing processing. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of winning a prize opening switch/state monitoring process. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of fraud & winning monitoring processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of winning number counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting change/confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure start opening switch common processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big prize opening switch monitoring process. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of specific area switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of jackpot flag 1 setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of jackpot flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of time saving end determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a time-saving end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of production mode information check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of special figure display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter part of the special figure display process. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process during small win fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of support operation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure usual processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during a small win fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit operation transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of fanfare/interval processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during the opening of the big prize opening. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big winning hole remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot end setting processing. It is a time chart showing how the presence or absence of time saving (that is, the presence or absence of general electricity support) changes in the case of a small hit (+V winning jackpot). It is a time chart showing how the presence or absence of time saving (that is, the presence or absence of general electricity support) changes in the case of a direct jackpot (a jackpot that does not go through a small hit). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a common figure game process. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of external information editing processing. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half of external information editing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of safety device related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an extra-region integration process. 5 is a flowchart showing the procedure of test signal output processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of performance display device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of difference ball confirmation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a safety device operation monitoring process. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the production control device. 7 is a flowchart showing received command check processing. 3 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart showing one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart showing prefetch symbol type command processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating prefetch variable command processing. It is a flowchart showing symbol-related command processing. 3 is a flowchart showing variable command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hit system command process. This is a table showing aspects of performance-related devices depending on the state of the safety device. 2 is a diagram showing spec examples 1 and 2 of the gaming machine 10. FIG. It is a diagram showing the distribution of jackpot symbols and small win symbols as stop symbols (stop results) of the special figure fluctuation display game. Various bonuses are executed for each symbol according to the game state when the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game wins, depending on the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot, the total number of time reductions, and the hit. It is a figure showing production. It is an example of a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state. It is a diagram showing an extracted flow of a typical game, and shows the transition of the number of time reductions (support modes A and B). This is an example of screen transitions showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (Part 1). This is an example of screen transitions showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (Part 2). This is an example of screen transitions showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order (part 3).

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. Note that in the description of the gaming machine, front, rear, left, and right refer to the directions seen from the player during the game.

[Overview of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge 16 so as to be rotatable in opening and closing. The opening/closing frame includes a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15 (front frame unit). Further, the left end of the opening/closing frame is a pivoted end that is attached to a hinge, and the right end is an open end that is opened by rotation. Note that the frame 11 and the front frame 12 constitute an outer frame unit 17.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible. Note that the cover glass 14 is shown as an example of a transparent member, and a plastic cover may be used instead of the cover glass 14. The glass frame 15 functions as a transparent member holding frame that holds a transparent member.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Furthermore, by opening the front frame 12 while the glass frame 15 is not open, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) etc. arranged on the back side of the game board 30. Can be done.

Various frame constituent members are arranged at the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

Decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c are arranged at the upper center, right side, and left side of the glass frame 15, and are capable of emitting light according to the game state. The decoration devices 18a, 18b, 18c are
It is a production device that houses lighting members such as LEDs inside and performs light emission production according to the game state. The lighting members disposed inside these decoration devices 18a, 18b, and 18c constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

The decoration device 18a is a top unit that extends in the left-right direction of the gaming machine 10 at the upper part of the glass frame 15 (or the opening/closing frame) and projects obliquely upward and forward. The decoration device 18a has a substantially flat front portion 456 having various indications such as the model name. Decoration device 1
8a is fixed and does not move in this embodiment, but it moves to protrude forward, upward, or diagonally from the retracted initial position (normal position) only when necessary, so as to reduce pressure on the player. Alternatively, it may move in the front-back direction or the up-down direction. Note that when the decoration device 18a (here, the top unit) operates (moves), it becomes a frame production device (movable accessory) that can move from the initial position to the operation position.

The decoration device 18b is a projecting unit (front frame light emitting unit) that extends vertically on the right side of the glass frame 15 and projects forward. The decoration device 18c is a projecting projecting unit (front frame light emitting unit) that extends vertically on the left side of the glass frame 15 and projects forward. The decoration devices 18b and 18c emit light toward the player toward the center (inside) of the gaming machine 10, and the light leaks to the outside of the gaming machine 10 from a plurality of openings.

An upper speaker 19a is provided at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the bottom of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is disposed at the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and at the lower right corner of the front frame 12. These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b are for emitting sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, etc. Note that the left and right upper speakers 19a are covered with right and left speaker decoration members 470, respectively.

An upper tray unit 20 having an upper tray 21 capable of storing game balls (game media) is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed into a box shape that is open at the top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to the ball firing device.

The upper tray unit 20 includes a performance operation device that accepts input operations from players, a ball lending operation device that accepts input operations from players, and a decoration device 2 that performs lighting effects etc. according to the game state.
2 and.

The performance operation device is an operation device including a performance button 25, a cross key switch 450, and volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, and is located at the upper center of the upper tray unit 20 and on the left side thereof for easy operation by the player. It is provided. The production button 25 is located on the operation panel 49.
0 is placed within the opening of the operation panel 490. The operation panel 490 is
It is possible to reflect light by plating the surface with metal or by making the entire surface metal, and has, for example, a silver metallic luster. When the performance button 25 emits light, the light from the performance button 25 is reflected on the surrounding operation panel 490, and the light emission performance of the performance button 25 becomes effective.

The effect button 25 may include a built-in effect button switch 25a and a touch panel 25b provided on the surface.

The volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b are located on the operation panel 49 of the upper tray unit 20.
0, and adjusts the volume of the speaker 19 (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) by increasing or decreasing (+-). The cross key switch 450 (cross key SW) is provided adjacent to the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b on the upper left side of the operation panel 490 of the upper tray unit 20, and adjusts, for example, the brightness of the performance LED. The cross key switch 450 may also be referred to as a direction key switch, and may be a general type consisting of a plurality of (for example, four) switches arranged in the front, rear, left, and right directions. For example, while waiting for customers and/or while playing (during a game)
In a predetermined state such as, the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b may be pressed down to adjust the volume of the speaker 19, and a switch before or after the cross key switch 450 may be pressed down to produce an effect. The amount of light (brightness, luminance) of the LED, etc. may be adjustable. Note that the cross key switch 4 is not provided with the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b.
The volume of the speaker 19 may be adjusted by pressing down the left or right switch 50.

When the player operates the performance operation device (particularly the performance button 25), the display device 41
(See FIG. 2) In the special figure variation display game, etc., it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened. For example, it is possible to select a performance pattern (performance mode), or to execute a preview performance that foretells in advance the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Incidentally, the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Furthermore, the effect pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being executed, but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the variable display game is not being executed.

Note that the game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state occurs. In addition, special gaming states include, for example, a time saving state as a specific gaming state, a state where the probability of a special result (e.g. jackpot) is high in a variable display game (variable probability state, variable probability state), jackpot state (
A special game state) and a small win game state (a small win state). In this way, the gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of gaming states with different probabilities of occurrence of special results, and the gaming control device 100 (gaming state selection means,
The setting means) can select (set) one gaming state from among the plurality of gaming states and set it as the current gaming state.

Here, the variable probability states (specific gaming states) include those that continue until the next jackpot occurs (loop type), those that continue until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number-of-time type, ST), and There is a type of lottery that continues until you win a lottery with a predetermined probability (fall lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not to generate a variable probability state may not be determined based on the jackpot symbol random number, but instead the variable probability state may be generated whenever a jackpot occurs.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the operation panel 490 of the upper tray unit 20. The ball lending operation device includes a balance display section 490a, a ball lending button 27, and a return button 28. Balance display section 490a
is a display area where the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed. The ball rental button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing game balls, and the return button 28 is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. This button is operated by the player.

The decoration device 22 houses lighting members such as LEDs inside, and is a device that performs lighting effects depending on the game state, and is provided in the upper tray unit 20. The lighting member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit 20, etc., and at the bottom of the front frame 12, there is an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launcher (not shown), and game balls can be stored. A lower plate unit 29 including a lower plate 23 and the like is provided. The lower plate unit 29 and the upper plate unit 20 are compatible in shape and are arranged side by side, one on top of the other in the vertical direction. By operating the upper tray operation section 435 of the upper tray unit 20, the game balls on the upper tray 21 can be caused to flow down to the lower tray 23.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operating handle 24, the ball firing device fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The firing speed of the game ball fired from the ball firing device is set to become faster as the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launcher can change the launch force (velocity) at which the game ball is launched into the game area 32 in accordance with the operation of the operating handle 24 by the player, and can be used in various launch modes with different launch forces. You can fire game balls. The firing mode includes left-handed hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32, and right-handed hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the gaming area 32.

The lower plate 23 of the lower plate unit 29 is arranged below the upper plate unit 20 with a predetermined interval therebetween. The lower plate 23 has a ball hole 23a that vertically passes through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation part 23b for opening and closing the ball hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation part 23b and opens the ball removal hole 23a, the lower plate 2
The game balls stored in 3 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removal hole 23a.

Further, on the back side of the front frame 12, there is a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices, an upper tank 448 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) installed in the island facility, and a A payout device (payout unit) for paying out game balls that have flown down onto the upper tray 21 is arranged.

[Game board]
Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be explained. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat game board main body 3 that serves as a mounting base for various components.
Equipped with 0a. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin.
A gaming area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided in front of the game area. The gaming machine 10 is
It is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the direction of the game balls flowing down, and the fired game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached that forms a window section that serves as a display area for a variable display game. Behind the window formed in the center case 40 is a production display device (variable display device) that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a variable manner (variable display).
A display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the displayed content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to one equipped with a liquid crystal display, and may be equipped with a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and each variable display area displays identification information (special symbols) and characters that produce a variable display game. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (a jackpot display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a game ball flowing down the game area 32.
An inlet 40a for guiding the ball into the warp passage 40e, and a stage portion 40b on which the game ball that has passed through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided. Since the stage part 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37,
The game ball rolling on the stage part 40b is likely to win a prize in the starting prize opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37.

An upper presentation unit 40c and a side presentation unit 40d are provided at the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
constitutes a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board presentation device 44 (see FIG. 4).

In the gaming area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (common symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the regular figure starting gate 34 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 34. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the regular figure starting gate 34, the regular figure variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 (general winning area) is arranged in the gaming area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the gaming area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40. Winning of game balls into these general winning holes 35 is detected by winning hole switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning holes 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is provided a starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 that provides starting conditions for the special figure variable display game. Center case 40
In the gaming area 32 on the right side of the page, below the normal figure starting gate 34 is a normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric accessory, general electricity) equipped with a second starting winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area). is provided. The normal variable prize winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts into a state where game balls can easily flow in by rotating forward. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37. When the game ball wins in the starting winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game. It should be noted that it is easier for a game ball to win in the starting prize opening 36 when the ball is hit to the left, and it is easier to win a game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 when the ball is hit to the right.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-shaped ordinary electric accessory, and is operated via the ordinary electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. It opens and changes to an open state (an easy winning state that is advantageous for the player) in which game balls easily flow into the normal variable winning device 37. If the movable member 37b is not in the open state (in the winning easy state),
The game ball enters the closed state where it is difficult to flow into the normal variable winning device 37 (a winning difficult state, a winning difficult state). In addition, in this embodiment, the starting winning hole 36 is different from the normal variable winning device 37,
Although it does not have a movable member (opening/closing member) and is always in an open state (open state), a configuration having a movable member (opening/closing member) is also possible.

In addition, the movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of easy-to-win states by shortening the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation display game or making the winning probability of the general pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual, By making the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the normal game state in which no game is performed, a time-saving state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific game state. Note that even in the variable probability state (excluding the latent variable state), the time saving state (general power support state) occurs overlappingly.

In the gaming area 32 to the right of the starting winning opening 36, there is a lower big winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3).
A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) is provided which has an attacker-type opening/closing door 38c that opens the lower large winning opening (lower large winning area) by retracting from the front to the back side. The first special variable winning device 38 changes the grand prize opening from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a gaming state advantageous to the player) depending on the result of the special figure variable display game.
By converting the game into a game ball and making it easier for game balls to flow into the lower jackpot, players are given a predetermined gaming value (for example, the number of time-savings/variable number of times after winning the prize ball or jackpot). ing.
In addition, in the lower large winning hole, a lower large winning hole switch 38a (count switch) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning hole. It should be noted that the first special variable winning device 38 makes it easier for game balls to win when the ball is hit to the right.

In the gaming area 32 below the normal variable winning device 37, there is a large winning opening solenoid 39b (Fig.
), the upper end side will rotate in the direction to the right to open the upper prize winning opening (upper prize winning area).
A second special variable prize winning device 39 is provided which has an opening/closing door 39c for opening. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the grand prize opening from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, By facilitating the flow of game balls into the jackpot, a predetermined gaming value (for example, the number of time reductions/variable probability after winning the prize ball or the jackpot) is given to the player. In addition, in the grand prize opening, an upper large winning a prize opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the said grand prize opening. It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 makes it easier for game balls to win when the ball is hit to the right. Moreover, the lower large winning a prize opening switch 38a and the upper large winning a prize opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as the large winning a prize opening switch 43.

Inside the second special variable winning device 39, a specific area 86 (so-called V winning hole) is provided. A jackpot is determined when a game ball enters a specific area 86 (V winning hole, V winning area) after the opening/closing door 39c is opened due to a small hit. The specific area 86 is only during a small hit.
It may be left open for a long time so that game balls can easily pass through. In addition, the game control device 100 can detect the passing of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described below), etc., and when the V winning is detected, the jackpot state ( In addition to confirming the transition to the V-winning jackpot state), information indicating that there is a V-winning (such as a specific area passing command) is transmitted to the production control device 300, which will be described later. And the production control device 30
0, the V winning prize can be notified on the display device 41 or the like.

That is, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixing machine (1+2 type machine). In this embodiment, by opening the second special variable prize winning device 39 with a small hit, the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened.
A game ball wins a V prize in a specific area 86 (V winning hole) in the special variable winning device 39, and a jackpot occurs.

General winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37, and special variable winning device 38
, 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls from the payout device to the upper tray 21 according to the type of winning hole. Further, in the lower gaming area 32, there is provided an exit opening 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like. In addition, in the general winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37, special variable winning device 38, 39 and their vicinity, there are LEDs that can emit light when a game ball wins a prize (a board decoration device described below). 46) are arranged.

In addition, outside the gaming area 32 and at the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, special pattern variation display games (special pattern 1 variation display game, special pattern 2 variation display game) and regular pattern variation display games are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display sections 51 to 60 that are composed of LED lamps (light emitting section, light emitting member) and display information such as the current gaming status.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display section 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) for the variable display game, which is composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp), etc. The display section 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), the variable display section 53 for the normal figure variable display game (normal figure indicator, lamps D8, D10, D18), and the start (on hold) of each variable display game. Memory display unit for informing the number of stored numbers (Special drawing 1 holding display 54, Special drawing 2 holding display 55, Regular drawing holding display 56
) and has. The special figure 1 reservation display 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12.
The special figure 2 reservation display 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. General figure hold display 56
is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display section 57 (a first game state indicator, a lamp) that informs that the player is playing right-handed (when he should play right-handed) or left-handed (normally playing). D7),
When the time saving state occurs, the second gaming state display section 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D17) lights up to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the jackpot probability state changes to the high probability state. The third game state display section 59 (third game state display, probability state display section, lamp D9), which displays the number of rounds at the time of jackpot (the number of times the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed, the upper limit of the number of rounds) A round display section 60 (lamp D3-D6) is provided to display the value).

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, the center segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (flashing). In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such segment type display parts.
It may be composed of an aggregate of multiple LEDs, and when performing a variable display, all LEDs provided as an indicator can be turned on or off (all LEDs blink at the same time), or cycled on (one of them). The light may be turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined intervals starting from one LED, or may be turned on and off (flashing) or cycled by a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs. Also on the regular figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the regular map display 53 and the special map 1 display 5
1. Like the special figure 2 display 52, it can be configured as appropriate.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform a variable display (blinking) that repeatedly lights up and turns off as a symbol (fourth special symbol, fourth symbol to be described later), and each special symbol variation. It has a lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for informing the number of starting (suspending) memorized games. Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by a production control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. In other words, switching between turning off and turning on the lamp display sections 1 and 2 is performed at 2 of the blinking cycle.
This is performed in a period of 1/100 msec (for example, 100 msec). The fluctuation time of the variable display on the special figure 1 display 51, special figure 2 display 52, and regular figure display 53 of the batch display device 50 is the game control device 1
00, while the fluctuation time of the lamp display sections 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 is measured by the production control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display parts 3 and 4 (special figure 1 holding LED 1, special drawing 1 holding LED 2) display the number of special drawings 1 holding (first start memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display parts 5 and 6 (special map 2 holding LED 1, special drawing 2 holding LED 2) display the number of special drawings 2 holding (second starting memory number) depending on the combination of off state, lighting state, and blinking state. do. The lamp display section 3-6 stops displaying the pending number when a jackpot occurs, but in cases other than the jackpot state (including when a reach described below is occurring on the display device 41), the lamp display section 3-6 stops displaying the pending number. conduct.

Next, details of the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the regular pattern fluctuation display game, and the special pattern fluctuation display game will be explained.

In the game machine 10, a game is played by firing a game ball toward the game area 32 from a ball firing device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing its rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. placed at various places in the game area 32, and passes through the normal figure starting gate 34, the general prize opening 35, and the starting prize opening. 36, enter a prize or ball into the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, 39, or use the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32
and is discharged from the gaming area 32. When a game ball wins in the general winning hole 35, the starting winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning hole enters the payout device. The liquid is discharged to the upper tray 21 through the medium.

The regular figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) that detects a game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the regular figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the regular figure fluctuation display game is executed based on the judgment result of the random number value for hit determination extracted at this time.

Conditions in which the general pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the general pattern fluctuation display game is already being played and the relevant general pattern fluctuation display game has not finished, or when the result of the general pattern fluctuation display game is a win and it is normal. When the variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the general pattern starting gate 34, if the basic pattern starting memory number (normal pattern pending number) is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added ( +1).

The normal figure starting memory (normal figure hold) stores a random value for determining a hit for determining the hit or miss of the general figure fluctuation display game, and when this random value for determining a hit matches the judgment value, When the general figure fluctuation display game becomes a hit, a specific result pattern (specific result) is derived.

The ordinary figure fluctuation display game is executed on the ordinary figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure indicator 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a hit when lit as ordinary identification information (ordinary figure) and indicates a miss when it is turned off. By blinking this LED, it is possible to detect fluctuations in the ordinary identification information. After a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

If the random figure extracted at the time of passing through the ordinary figure starting gate 34 is a winning value, the ordinary symbol (ordinary figure) displayed on the ordinary figure display 53 stops in a winning state and becomes a winning state. At this time,
By driving the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is changed to the open state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds x 2 times), and the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is performed. Permissible.

The winning of the game ball into the starting winning hole 36 and the winning into the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting hole 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting hole 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that won the starting winning hole 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game,
The winning balls are stored up to a predetermined upper limit number, and the game balls that win in the normal variable winning device 37 are detected as starting winning balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored up to a predetermined upper limit number.

At the time of detecting the starting prize ball of the special figure fluctuation display game, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, each fluctuation pattern random number, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure starting winning memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times at most). The number of stored special drawing starting winnings is displayed on the special drawing 1 holding display 54 and special drawing 2 holding display 55 for informing the starting winning number of the batch display device 50, and also on the display device 4.
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the starting prize opening 36 or the first starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory, special figure 1 pending). . In addition, the game control device 100 controls the special pattern 2 variable display game on the special pattern 2 display 52 based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 or the second starting memory (special pattern 2 starting memory, special pattern 2 pending). Execute.

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), identification information ( This is done by displaying a predetermined result mode in a fixed manner after variably displaying special symbols (special symbols, special symbols).

In addition, in the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to each special figure variable display game.

In the decorative special symbol variable display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbols (identification information, decorative special symbols) composed of the numbers, etc. described above are displayed on the left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle ( This is done by starting a variable display (scroll display) in the order of the third special symbol), stopping the varying symbols one after another after a predetermined time, and displaying the result of the special symbol variable display game. Furthermore, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters to increase interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variable display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), a fourth special symbol ( 4th symbol) changes. The variable display on the lamp display sections 1 and 2 stops after a predetermined period of time from the start, with the light turned off in the case of a loss, and with the light turned on in the case of a jackpot or small win.

When a game ball enters the starting winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number at the time of winning detection is the jackpot value), as a result of the special figure variable display game. A specific result pattern (special result pattern) is derived depending on the displayed symbol, and a jackpot state (
special game state). Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are operated by the big winning opening solenoids (38b, 39b) (
(See FIG. 3), the big prize opening is converted from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the big prize opening provided in the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is wide open for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time the player has the privilege of being able to win many game balls. Granted.

If a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (if the jackpot random number at the time of winning detection is a small winning value), the special figure variable display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, resulting in a small win state. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine the small hit, but the small win value (small hit judgment value) is different from the jackpot value (jackpot judgment value).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 operate the big winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b (Fig.
By energizing the (see), the big prize opening is converted from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined short time.
In addition, the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small winning state (small winning gaming state) than in the jackpot state (special gaming state), so in the small winning state the player can win more games than in the jackpot state. The value (number of pitches acquired) is low. In addition, in both the small winning state and the jackpot state, the big winning opening is in the open state, but the jackpot state may be called the first special gaming state, and the small winning state may be called the second special gaming state. For simplicity, in this embodiment, the special variable winning device 39 (
The configuration is such that only the special variable winning device 38 (lower large prize opening) is converted to the open state in the jackpot state (including the jackpot state due to V winning during the small winning). explain.

Here, the difference between a big hit and a small hit will be explained.

A jackpot is a special result that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small hit is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device is activated when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol fluctuation display game (stop display of the jackpot symbol).When the condition device is activated, for example, a jackpot condition occurs and a special electric accessory is activated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is set. In addition, the activation of the conditional device means that the specific area 86
It may also mean that the game ball passed through (V winning). When the conditional device is not activated, it means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set, as in the case of simply winning a small lottery, for example. However, as will be described later in this embodiment, if there is a V win during the small winning state, the conditional device will be activated. Note that the "condition device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. In addition, the “conditional device” is
This term is commonly used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and is also used herein with the same meaning. ing.

Specifically, in the case of a jackpot, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the jackpot flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the small winning flag. will be released.

In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or may be configured as the same display, but each special figure fluctuation display game is not executed at the same time. It is set as follows. In addition, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a starting memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (special figure 2 pending priority extinguishment, special figure 2 priority variation).

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or they may be executed on the same display. It may also be executed on the device or display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may not be executed at the same time.

In addition, in the following explanation, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variable display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36
a. The starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch (38a, 39a) in the normal variable winning device 37 are equipped with a magnetic detection coil, and when a metal comes close to the coil, a magnetic field is generated. Non-contact magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used that detect game balls using changing phenomena. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (gaming frame) 12 etc. Microswitches with standard contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the gaming control system of the gaming machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0 (main board), the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that centrally controls the game, and includes a CPU section having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. 110, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130.

The CPU section 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that includes an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator and generates a reference clock for a CPU operating clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply unit 400 includes a normal power supply section 410 that includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V or DC 5V from a DC 32V voltage, and the like. , gaming microcomputer 11
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 in the event of a power outage, and a power outage monitoring circuit, and provides control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage. The control signal generating section 430 generates and outputs a control signal generating section 430 and the like.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integrated with the gaming control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when changing the model, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 43 are installed on a power supply device 400 or a board separate from the main board, as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, it is possible to exclude it from replacement and reduce costs.

The backup power supply section 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is provided by the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is maintained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops to 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power outage, changes the power outage monitoring signal, and generates a reset signal after a predetermined time. Output. Also, when the power is turned on or when a power failure is recovered, a reset signal is output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the gaming control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated.
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is read from the gaming microcontroller 1.
11 is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 is turned on by an operator's rotational operation or the like, thereby making it possible to change probability setting values (setting values) according to settings regarding game conditions (games). Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as the jackpot probability or the small winning probability, but other game conditions (such as effects) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. For example, the higher the probability setting value is, the higher the winning probability may be. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are used for setting (
A setting changing means (setting changing device 42, setting means) capable of changing the probability setting value) is configured. Note that another switch instead of the RAM initialization switch 112 may also serve as the setting value change switch, or a unique setting value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10, so that they are placed in a position where they cannot be operated (inaccessible) unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. be done. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (power outage recovery, power restoration), the gaming machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the on/off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to transition to various states such as a setting variable state (setting change state, setting possible state, setting change mode) that can be changed (settable), and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) that allows you to check the probability setting value. .

In this embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in six stages, for example, and probability setting value 1 (setting 1
), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the most disadvantageous setting for the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area changes to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1).
→ Setting value 1 (Setting 2, Probability setting value 2) → Setting value 2 (Setting 3, Probability setting value 3) → Setting value 3 (
Setting 4, probability setting 4) → Setting 4 (setting 5, probability setting 5) → Setting 5 (setting 6, probability setting 6) → Setting 0 (setting 1) → Setting 1 (setting 2) → It will be changed as follows. In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For convenience of explanation, work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to probability setting values 1 to 6, respectively, during the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting values and probability setting values are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning them within a numerical range (ie, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (setting the work setting value and the probability setting value to the same numerical value).

Note that the probability setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch). Further, the probability setting value is not limited to six levels. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected working setting value of 0 to 5 is displayed by a performance display device 152 that is, for example, a 4-digit, 7-segment type (8-segment type if dot Dp is included) display. etc. will be displayed. Furthermore, information regarding setting values such as display probability setting values (for example, a display that allows readable probability setting values 1 to 6) may be displayed on the front surface of the gaming machine (for example, the collective display device 50). In addition, on the front of the gaming machine (for example, the all-in-one display device 50), display probability setting values, etc. are displayed not only during the setting variable state or setting confirmation state, but also during the execution of game control (during execution of game processing described later). Information regarding setting values may also be displayed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and an RA that can be read and written at any time.
M (random access memory) 111c is provided.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area for the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control, and stores information related to games (gaming information), and can retain the stored information even if a power outage occurs. It becomes a storage storage means that can store data. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the performance, the presence or absence of a ready-to-reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table used by the CPU 111a to determine a fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored in the starting memory. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a loss fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second-half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as a second-half fluctuation group table and second-half fluctuation pattern selection table), and tables for determining the fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state. It includes tables (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining first half variation patterns, which are patterns.

Here, reach (ready-to-reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and the multiple display results are predetermined. A gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player when a special result mode occurs (special gaming state)
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed,
This is a display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode have not been met. This refers to the display mode that does not exist. For example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result aspect is complete (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Furthermore, the reach state is the display state at the point when the display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, and is determined before the display results are derived and displayed. A display state in which at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, a decorative special figure variable display game displayed on a display device in response to a special figure variable display game may vary a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is to be stopped in the left, right, and middle order to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas will display a state where the conditions for the special result mode are met (for example, The state in which the variable display stops with the same identification information is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meet the conditions for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information (However, special result modes are excluded) may be set as a ready-to-win state, and the remaining variable display area may be displayed in a variable manner from the ready-to-reach state.

The reach state includes multiple reach performances, and the systems (types) of reach performances with different possibilities (different expectations) of deriving a special result mode (jackpot mode) are normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP
2 Reach), Special 3 Reach (SP3 Reach), and Premier Reach.
Note that the expectation level (expected value) of a jackpot increases in the following order: No reach < Normal reach < Special 1 reach < Special 2 reach < Special 3 reach < Premier reach. Moreover, the reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in the special symbol variable display game (when it becomes a jackpot). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the result is a loss). Therefore, a state in which a ready-to-win state occurs is a state in which there is a high possibility of a jackpot compared to a case in which a ready-to-reach state does not occur.

In addition, the expectation level of a performance (notice) indicates the probability of a jackpot if the performance is selected, and the selection rate of the performance when it is a jackpot and the selection rate of the performance when it is not a jackpot (when it is a loss). It can be calculated based on selection rate, etc.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300, generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and display device, and operates the game machine. Controls the entire 10. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates jackpot random numbers for determining jackpots in the special symbol fluctuation display game, jackpot symbols (jackpot stop symbols), small win symbols (small win stop symbols), and time-saving symbols. Special symbol random numbers to determine (symbols that hit support, stop symbols that hit support), fluctuation patterns in special symbol fluctuation display games (including execution time of fluctuation display games in various reach and non-reach fluctuation displays) A random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers etc. for determining the oscillation pattern, and a timer interrupt of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. It is equipped with a clock generator that generates a clock that provides update timing for signals and random number generation circuits.

In addition, the CPU 111a uses the ROM 111b in processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game.
Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the memory is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111a stores the game results (jackpot or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the starting memory number. Based on the above, one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from among the plurality of variation pattern tables. Here, CPU11
1a constitutes a fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit according to the prize ball payout command (command and data) from the game control device 100, and releases the prize balls. Performs control to pay out.
Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600 to pay out rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the regular figure starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting prize opening 36. Switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37 (normal variable winning device), winning port switch 35a of the general winning port 35, special variable winning device 38
, 39 big winning opening switch 43 (lower big winning opening switch 38a, upper big winning opening switch 39a
), and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V.
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which inputs a negative logic signal such as 0V to 5V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V to 5V.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to a specific area switch 72, a remaining ball outlet switch 73, and an out ball detection switch 74. Specific area switch 72
detects passage of the game ball (V winning hole) to the specific area 86 (V winning hole). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects the game balls that have passed through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging the game balls from the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The out ball detection switch 74 detects all the game balls that have been launched into the game area and finished the game (that is, all the game balls that have passed through the winning opening or the out opening 30b).

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, winning port switch 35a, and large winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. .

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in a sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , detection signals from the specific area switch 72 , remaining ball outlet switch 73 , or out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126 .

The second input port 123 also receives a detection signal from a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 etc. of the gaming machine 10, and a detection signal for detecting a glass frame opening provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10. A vibration sensor 6 that detects a switch 63, a signal from a front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., and vibrations of the gaming machine 10.
A signal from 5 is input.

Further, the second input port 123 takes in a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the gaming control device 100 to a test shooting test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12V is supplied to the proximity I/F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is transmitted to the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

The input unit 120 also includes a frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow signal. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
A first input port 122 is provided for taking in signals from the game computer 12 and supplying them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via a data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (that it is full). The frame radio wave fraud signal is a signal that is output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting radio waves, and the payout busy signal indicates whether the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands. This is a signal indicating whether or not.

In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111, etc., and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has the function of removing noise from.
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken in to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and is also input directly to the output section 13.
0 ports. In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the sight-fire test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the sight-fire test device is turned off. It is configured as follows.

Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RST can be output to the sight test equipment via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RST is applied to each port 122, 123 of the input section 120.
, 124. The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent system malfunction. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the performance control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that this is one-way communication in which signals cannot be input from the production control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140 and sends data to inform a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) of special symbol information of a variable display game, a signal indicating a jackpot probability state, etc. via a relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine that is an actual machine (mass-produced and sold product) installed in a game parlor. Note that the detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting port switch, outputted from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information so that, for example, the gaming machine can control the gaming. An error signal indicating that this is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test equipment via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

Note that the relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the sight test equipment, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal without going through the buffer. There is. The gaming microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE outputted from 1 is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by the signal CE are supplied to the sight test equipment.

The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (normal electric solenoid) 37c that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) that opens the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) that opens the second special variable winning device 39, and outputting opening/closing data of the lever solenoid 86b that operates the lever and opens the specific area 86. Two output ports 134 are provided.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting on/off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50; Turn on/off the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

The output unit 130 also includes a sixth output port 141 for outputting on/off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the performance display device 152; A seventh output port 142 is provided for outputting on/off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 also outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to an external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is equipped with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game parlor (an information collection terminal, a game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can transmit information regarding the game machine 10 to the outside. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 includes a general voltage solenoid 37 outputted from the second output port 134.
The first driver (drive circuit) 138a receives the opening/closing data signals of the big prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b, etc. and generates and outputs the solenoid drive signal, and the current supply for the collective display device 50 is output from the third output port 135. A second driver 138b outputs an on/off drive signal for the side segment line, and a third driver outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. 138c, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal 71.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 includes a performance display device 152 output from the sixth output port 141.
The performance display segment driver 150a outputs an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the performance display device 152, which outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current draw side of the performance display device 152 output from the seventh output port 142. A performance display digit driver 150b for output is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that it can drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. In addition, the batch display device 50
DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line. The third driver 138c that drives the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data with a current, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via the digit line, thereby creating a collective display device. At 50, a power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence by a dynamic driving method and the LEDs are turned on. The performance display segment driver 150a that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the performance display digit driver 150b that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via the digit line. In the performance display device 152, a power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence by a dynamic driving method and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134,
The first driver 138a and the like may be provided on the output section 130 of the gaming control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
Reference numeral 9 is configured to enable mutual communication between the gaming microcomputer 111 and the inspection device 500 so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication. Note that such data transmission and reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111, similar to a normal general-purpose microprocessor, so ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 includes a plurality of (four) 7-segment type (dot Dp
It consists of an 8-segment type display (LED lamp), and a performance display driver 1.
Although 50a and 150b are LED drivers, they are not limited to this.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
It may also be provided at other locations. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, an accessory ratio, a ball output rate, and the number of balls ejected.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls)
This is the total of the number of game balls that passed through the winning opening (number of winnings) and the number of gaming balls that passed through the out opening 30b. The number of ejected balls is counted by the signal of the out ball detection switch 74, etc.
It can be obtained by In this embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), and a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2).
), and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (big winning opening).

The ball output rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of balls released (or the number of balls launched into the game area 32), and is (number of balls acquired ÷ number of balls released) x 100 (%). is calculated. That is, the ball output rate is the number of balls acquired (total number of prize balls) per 100 balls ejected.

For example, the accessory ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering the winning slot in a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present), during the jackpot state. It is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by accessory) obtained by entering the big prize opening (= so-called continuous prize winning ratio). In addition, the accessory ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (in the jackpot state and the small win state) obtained by entering the big winning hole out of the total number of winning balls (= big winning hole ratio). , or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= commonly used so-called accessory ratio (total accessory ratio) )) is fine.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 also has the function of a safety device. A safety device is a safety device that is activated when operating conditions (predetermined conditions) based on the number of safe balls and the number of ejected balls are established. This is a game stopping means (stopping means) that can generate a game stopping state (game impossible state, game prohibited state) in which games such as the above games cannot be executed. In the game stop state, a new special symbol fluctuation display game and a new regular symbol fluctuation display game cannot be started. With the safety device, it is possible to take appropriate measures against fraud in cases where the number of safe balls is abnormally high due to fraud, and it is also possible to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game. When addiction is suppressed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, the safety device is software (program) in the gaming control device 100.
This is a function realized by , and is also called a complete function (or ending function, abort function). Of course, the safety device may be provided as hardware such as an electric circuit or a circuit board.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operating conditions of the safety device are (1) the number of differential balls indicating the difference between the number of safe balls and the number of ejected balls has reached the differential ball reference value (predetermined value), and (2) ) It is neither a big hit nor a small hit. The difference number of balls is the number of safe balls minus the number of ejected balls (number of difference balls = number of safe balls - number of ejected balls). In this way, the operating conditions for the safety device are two-stage conditions (1).
It consists of (2). Note that the difference in the number of balls related to condition (1), as mainly described in this embodiment, is simply the difference between the number of safe balls and the number of ejected balls from the time the power is turned on to the present, with the time when the power is turned on as zero. That's fine. However, the number of difference balls regarding condition (1) is the number of difference balls in a predetermined period from the lowest value of the number of difference balls to the present, that is, the number of difference balls based on the minimum value (the number of difference balls increased from the lowest value) The maximum increase in the number of differential balls in one business day (so-called MY) may be sufficient. Further, other operating conditions may be used; for example, condition (1) may be such that the number of safe pitches reaches a predetermined value. Furthermore, the condition (2) may be such that the special variable winning device is not operating or the big winning opening is not in an open state.

In this embodiment, the number of safe balls is determined for a predetermined period (for example, the period from power-on to the present).
This is the total number of prize balls (number of acquired balls, balls put out) determined to be paid out. If there is an error in the payout of prize balls (game balls), the total number of prize balls determined to be paid out will be equal to the total number of prize balls actually paid out to the upper tray 21 via the payout device. However, the total number of prize balls actually paid out may be measured with a detection switch or the like and used as the safe number of balls. Further, the number of ejected balls (number of out balls) is the number of game balls ejected from the gaming area 32 in a predetermined period, and can be counted by counting the signal from the out ball detection switch 74.

Note that the number of fired balls, which is the number of fired balls launched and introduced into the game area 32, may be used instead of the number of ejected balls, and the difference number of balls may be the number of safe balls minus the number of fired balls. The number of game balls fired and the number of ejected balls can be collectively referred to as the number of balls used (difference number of balls = number of safe balls - number of balls used). The number of balls fired excludes foul balls that were fired by the ball launcher but did not reach the game area 32, and the difference number of balls is subtracted by -1 when one game ball is fired by the ball launcher, If one ball is produced, +1 will be added. A detection switch (detection sensor) for counting the number of fired balls may be provided at the entrance of the game balls to the game area 32, that is, near the upper end of the guide path for the fired game balls on the game board 30.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 (subboard) will be explained using FIG. 4. Figure 4
1 is a block diagram of the production control system of the gaming machine 10. FIG.

The production control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, uses an amusement chip (IC).
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying video on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 that controls the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (Programmable Read Only Memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe memory that can retain memory contents even when power is not supplied during a power outage.
The RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.). Note that a RAM providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines display content, instructs the VDP 312 to output video content, and controls the sound source LSI 314.
It performs processing such as instructing the playback of sounds, lighting decorative lamps, controlling the drive of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read out from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYN is sent from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 for synchronizing the image on the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30.
C. A synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
The main control microcomputer 311 receives interrupt signals INT0 to INT0 to notify processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait signal to indicate that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. Signals such as WAIT are also input.

The production control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 using the LVDS (low amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the audio source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is now entered. The production control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is outputted from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the production control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I/F3
31, receive the decoration special figure reservation number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 as a production control command signal (production command). . The gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the production control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The production control device 300 also includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided therein, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40)
A board performance movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling movable accessories (such as movable accessories that enhance the performance effect in cooperation with the performance display). Note that the board decoration device 46 includes the aforementioned lamp display device 8.
May contain 0.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. Note that a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls a frame effect device (for example, the top unit) of a motor or the like (such as a motor that moves the top unit) provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the production button 25, a cross key switch 450, a volume adjustment Detects the on/off state of the button switches 451a, 451b, the performance accessory switch 47 (performance motor switch) that detects the initial position of the motor in the board performance device 44, etc., and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311. A switch input circuit 336 is provided which detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply section 410 of the power supply device 400 is the production control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by it, 32V DC to drive the motor and solenoids, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, 12V DC to drive the motor and LEDs, DC5 which becomes the power supply voltage of command I/F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker.

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- A DC converter is provided in the production control device 300. In addition, DC-
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. In addition, in the form of output from the main control microcomputer 311, VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), sound source LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the performance control device 300 includes a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
When N45 is connected and the production control device 300 is powered on, the cooling FAN 45 is driven.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be explained. Game control device 1
The CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 of No. 00 extracts a random value for determining the hit of a common figure based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the common figure starting gate 34, and stores it in the ROM 111b. It compares it with the judgment value given and judges whether the game is successful or not.

Then, a common symbol variation display game is displayed on the common symbol display 53, in which the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopped. When the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the ordinary figure display 53, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is held for a predetermined period of time (e.g. , 3 seconds x 2 times) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a conversion control execution means that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the result pattern of the loss on the normal pattern display 53.

In addition, the starting prize (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable display game is determined based on the starting memory. The random number value is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111b to judge whether the special figure 1 variable display game is a hit or a miss.

In addition, a starting memory is stored based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on the starting memory, a random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is stored. is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether the special figure 2 variable display game is a hit or a miss.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (performance control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game to the production control device 300. Then, a special figure variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, in which the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopped. That is, the game control device 100 is a game control means that controls the progress of the variable display game based on winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning winning device 37). to do.

In addition, the production control device 300 displays a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Furthermore, the performance control device 300 performs processing such as setting the performance state, outputting sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the performance control device 300 constitutes a performance control means that controls the performance related to games (variable display games, etc.).

Then, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a win, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. let In the process of generating a special gaming state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 is opened by the big winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to enable the game balls to flow into the big winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) enter the grand prize opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the grand prize opening. One round (R) is defined as opening the big prize opening until the above condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15, 11, or 2 times) (cycle game) I do. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a big winning opening/closing control means that controls opening/closing of the big winning opening when the stop result mode becomes a special result mode. Moreover, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the result mode of the loss on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result aspect of the special symbol fluctuation display game. High probability state (definite variable state) is
The probability of a winning result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, even if a high probability state is achieved based on the result of either the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game Both become high probability states.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result aspect of the special symbol fluctuation display game. In the time saving state, the normal variable winning device 37 may be controlled to be in the time saving operation state, and the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time may be controlled to be in a time saving operating state, and the normal variable winning device 37 may be controlled to be in a time saving operating state.
Since the open time of 7 is controlled to be substantially increased, it becomes a general power support state. In addition,
Even in high-probability states (normal probability-variable states) other than latent probability-variable states, power supply support is performed by redundantly switching to the time-saving state.

In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time (special figure variation time) of the special figure variation display game can also be shortened than usual, and the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game can also be executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variable winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal power is opened) is greater than the first number of times it is opened (for example, two times) for one winning result of the general figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of openings to (for example, 4 times). In addition, in the time saving state, the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability, normal pattern winning probability) is set to a high probability that is higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state. is possible.

In the short time state, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is brought into the open state by changing one or more of the normal figure fluctuation time, the normal figure stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power open time, and the common figure probability. Allow more time to convert than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37 than in the normal game state where no special game is played, and the number of executions of the special figure variable display game per unit time is higher than in the normal game state. It is also possible to increase the execution interval of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is also possible to set multiple types of time-saving states in which different things are changed. Further, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operating state (the normal figure probability is 0). Furthermore, when a win occurs, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the first opening mode and the second
The selection probabilities of the open modes may be made different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
As described above, the device shifts to four states (modes) depending on the on/off states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on.

If the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting possible) in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (settable) state, setting change mode) (see A1030-A1039 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 14).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, a transition is made to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (Fig. 5B, A1034-A1039 and FIG. 14).

Also, when the power is turned on, although the setting key switch 93 is off, the RAM initialization switch 11
2 is turned on, it moves to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) and R
AM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) is executed, and the RAM 111c is initialized (see A1045 to A1047 in FIG. 5B).

When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the device shifts to a normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) and is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Control of a gaming machine that plays such a game will be explained below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be explained. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 is mainly shown in FIGS. 5A, 5B, and 5.
It consists of the main process shown in C and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9, which is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (gaming control device)]
First, the main processing will be explained. 5A, FIG. 5B, and FIG. 5C show the game control device 100
3 is a flowchart illustrating the main processing procedure of FIG. The main processing starts when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the gaming control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A****".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process to prohibit interrupts (A1001). Furthermore, stack pointer setting processing is executed to set a stack pointer which is the start address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Next, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of game balls from the ball firing device is prohibited. ing. After that, the gaming control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is,
The signals from the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Furthermore, the gaming control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value to the power supply delay timer, the game control device 1 serves as the main control means.
A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from 00 starts normally.
seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the gaming control device 100 starts up first and sends a command to the sub-control device before the sub-control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up, the sub-control device can avoid missing commands. That is, when the game control device 100 turns on the power, it delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and activates the slave control devices (payout control device 200, production control device 3).
00, etc.) serves as a standby means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation.

Furthermore, the power supply delay timer is timed using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (such as a RAM area or register that is not subject to validity determination). As a result, when calculating check data such as checksum of RAM area, some R
Since there is no need to perform calculations excluding the AM region, it is possible to prevent complicated control at power-on.

Note that by reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operations of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated or the power turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 until the standby time elapses. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it is possible to avoid a situation where the settings key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 operations performed at power-on are not accepted, without having to perform such troublesome operations. It can be prevented.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the gaming control device 100 executes a process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the standby time (A1008 to A1008).
1010).

When the power outage monitoring process is started, the gaming control device 100 first determines whether a power outage has occurred by reading the power outage monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus. (A1008). If a power outage has occurred (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the gaming machine waits until the power is cut off.

The gaming control device 100, if a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N")
, updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009), and determines whether the timer value is 0 (A1010). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power outage monitoring means that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power outage that occurs during a period in which the startup of the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the memory contents from the previous power cut are still retained, so backup processing will be performed in the event of a power outage. There's no need. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the timer value is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100
), that is, when the standby time has ended, access to readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (no output state). ) (A1012).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (A1013 ).

Next, the gaming control device 100 generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
(A1014). Note that the CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator within the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113.
It is provided with a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for U111a and a signal CTC that provides a trigger for random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 reads the RAM (RAM 111c here) indicating an abnormality.
The M abnormality flag is set (A1015). Here, a flag assuming an abnormality is set in a predetermined register.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the value of the power failure test area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure test area check data (A1016). And if it is normal (A101
6), it is determined whether the value of the power failure test area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure test area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, if the value of the power outage inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 performs a checksum calculation that calculates a checksum of a predetermined area within the RWM (for example, a work area within the area). The process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal, and the RAM abnormality flag indicating the abnormality of the RAM is cleared (A1020). Thereafter, the process moves to step A1021.

In addition, the gaming control device 100 determines that the check data in the power outage inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), or if the check sums do not match. (the result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 includes a setting key switch 93 and a RAM initialization switch 112.
It is determined whether both switches are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 shifts to a setting variable state (setting change mode) and executes the process of changing probability settings in steps A1030-A1040. .

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is “N”), the gaming control device 100
111c) is set (A102).
2). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), step A103
4-A1040 process during probability setting confirmation (in setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) in steps A1044-A1047, or step A
1044 and A1048-A1051, the normal power-on processing (power restoration time) is executed.

When the probability setting changing flag is set, the gaming control device 100 executes (A1023)
The result is "Y"), a main abnormality error notification command is sent to the production control device 300 to notify that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) (A1024)
. The production control device 300 that received the main abnormal error notification command is the game control device 10
Notify that 0 abnormalities have occurred.

Next, the game control device 100 controls the driver 15 of the performance display device 152 in order to display the 7-segment display data (data for error display of “E1”) when the game is stopped on the performance display device 152.
Output to 0a and 150b (A1025). Then, on-data of a security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 to notify an external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collection terminal, etc.) of an abnormality (A1026). Here, even if the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the jackpot signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in an off state. Thereafter, repeat the processing of steps A1025 and A1026, wait, and perform the setting change operations (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 1) again.
12) and wait for the power to be turned on. Note that while the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated and are on standby, interrupts remain prohibited (A1001), and the timer interrupt process (Fig. 9
) cannot be executed, so games (special figure variable display game, regular figure variable display game, round game, etc.) cannot be executed.

In this way, the settings change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112
If the probability setting changing flag is set even though both of the on operations (on operations) have not been executed, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and the processes A1024 to A1026 are executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation has not been performed. be.

On the other hand, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102
2 result is "Y"), a main abnormality error notification command is sent to the production control device 300 to notify that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) (A1024), and the 7-segment when the game is stopped The display data (error display data of "E1") is output to the drivers 150a and 150b of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and the ON data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 in order to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality. Output (A1026). Note that, as described above, even if information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the jackpot signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in an off state.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (A1027), and if a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1027 is "N"), the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and the process waits. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has occurred (the result of A1027 is "Y"),
Off data is output to all output ports (A1028), and access to readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is prohibited (A1029). After that, the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (in the setting variable state). First, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1030). If the RAM error flag is set (A1030 result is “Y”)
''), it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct or not, so clear the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c and set it to the initial value (for example, the lowest setting value "1") (A1031 ), set the probability setting changing flag to indicate that the probability setting is being changed (
A1032). If the RAM error flag is not set (A1030 result is “N”)
"), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1032).
Next, a command for changing the probability setting is sent to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1
033), the process moves to step A1037. In addition, the production control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being changed on the display device 41 or the like.

In the gaming control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), and the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1034). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1034 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, and the process during probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) starts, and the probability A probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1035). Then, the command for checking the probability setting is sent to the production control device 30.
0 (effect control board) (A1036), and the process moves to step A1037. In addition, the production control device 300 which received the command for changing the probability setting notifies on the display device 41 etc. that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1033 or step A1036, the gaming control device 100 executes the processes from step A1037 to A1043 as a common process during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation.

The gaming control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output a security signal during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation (A1037). Note that the count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (Figure 14) described below, but if the probability setting change or probability setting confirmation ends early, the remaining The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1318). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation.

Next, the gaming control device 100 allows an interrupt (A1038). This makes it possible to execute the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A1039). If the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1039 is "N"), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (A1040). If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1040 is "N"), the process returns to step A1039. on the other hand,
If a power outage has occurred (result of A1040 is "Y"), steps A1063-A10
69 is executed when a power outage occurs.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power outage has not occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The settings confirmation state (settings confirmation mode) continues.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off, the game control device 100 (A1039
The result is "Y"), interrupts are prohibited (A1041), and a command to end the notification is sent to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1042). In addition, the production control device 300 that has received the command to end the notification ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the notification that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether the probability setting has been changing so far (A1043). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1043 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting has been changing so far, execute the RAM initialization process (described later) in steps A1045 to A1047. do. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1043 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting has been confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1048 (when the power is restored) Perform normal processing.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1034 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1044).
. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1044 is "Y"), the R.A.
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing probability setting values is set to 0.
Clear (A1045). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. At this point, the aforementioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared. Further, the acquired game ball number area that stores the acquired game ball number, which is the number (total) of prize balls acquired within a predetermined time period (here, within one timer interrupt), is also cleared to 0. Then, the safety device operating flag area that stores the safety device operating flag indicating whether or not the safety device (described above) is operating is also cleared to 0 (safety device operating flag = 0), and the safety device is not activated. It will be canceled. In addition, in step A1045, whether the RAM is cleared with a setting change (if the result of A1043 is "Y") or the RAM is cleared without a setting change (if the result of A1044 is "Y"), the safety The operation of the safety device is canceled by clearing the device operation flag area to 0, but the operation of the safety device may be canceled only in one case. That is, when clearing the RAM in step A1045, the safety device operating flag area may not be cleared to 0.

In addition to the probability setting value area, this section also includes configurations in which the stack area and unused area are not cleared, and a performance display work area (part of the outside work area) related to performance information and its display (performance display). ) and the stack area (stack area outside the area) do not need to be cleared. The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, and includes, for example, ball output rate, base value (ball output rate in normal gaming state), role object ratio, number of balls ejected, etc. be.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1046). Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1047), and the process moves to step A1052. Note that areas that are not cleared to 0 in step A1045 are excluded from the areas to be initialized.

On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, the gaming control device 100 (A1
044 result is "N"), the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 are both off, so normal power-on processing (when power is restored from a power outage) is started, and as a power outage recovery process. Save the initial value at the time of power restoration (power restoration) in the area to be initialized (A104
8). The area to be initialized here includes power failure test area 1, power failure test area 2, and checksum area of the intra-area work area (FIG. 6). In addition, since all errors are re-monitored when the power is turned on normally, the area that should be initialized is either the work area within the area or the work area outside the area (Figure 6), or the area related to error monitoring (error-related test signal output data area, etc.). Furthermore, the aforementioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared (initialized) here. The area to be initialized in step A1048 may be added as necessary. Note that, unlike when initializing the RAM, when the power is turned on normally, the safety device activation flag area in the area work area (Figure 6) is not cleared (initialized) to prevent the safety device activation from being canceled. Value is maintained.

Furthermore, the safety device-related work areas (safety device counter area, safety device operation information area, and old operation information area described later) related to safety devices in the outside work area are not initialized in step A1048, but the safety device information initialization area described later is not initialized in step A1048. It is initialized in the initialization process (A1053). In addition,
By initializing the safety device counter value (information regarding the number of differential balls) in the safety device counter area, the margin (tolerable range of the number of differential balls, The limit on the number of balls can be increased. The work area for performance display in the work area outside the area is also not initialized in step A1048, but as described later, performance display editing processing (A1059)
) may be initialized.

Also, step A1 at normal power-on without RAM initialization (when power is restored from a power outage).
In 048, the ceiling counter area (described later) in which a ceiling counter value indicating the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in a state other than the probability fluctuation state after the power is turned on or after the end of the jackpot is stored is also disadvantageous to the player. The value may be maintained without being cleared (initialized) to prevent As will be described later, when the ceiling counter value reaches the ceiling number of times, the time saving state is entered (Fig. 34B), but since the ceiling counter value is not cleared (initialized), the time saving state occurs (up to the ceiling number of times).
The remaining number of games remains unchanged even when the power is turned on, and the player is not disadvantaged.

In addition, when this number of executions (that is, the ceiling counter value) or the remaining number of games until the ceiling (the number of times of the ceiling - the number of executions) is displayed on the display device 41 by displaying a variable number of times, the effect control device 300 can be At the time of input, the number of fluctuations display may be matched with the ceiling counter value in the ceiling counter area, or the number of fluctuations display may be displayed with an initial value of 0 without matching. In addition,
If consistency is not achieved, the fluctuation count display will display a value that does not reflect the ceiling counter value.

Similarly, in step A1048, the remaining execution of the special figure variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game) in the time-saving state is carried out so as not to be disadvantageous to the gaming hall side (gaming parlor side). The time reduction variation number 1 area stores the time reduction variation number 1 (described later) corresponding to the number of times, and the time reduction variation number 2 (described later) corresponding to the remaining execution number of the special figure 2 variation display game in the time reduction state. The stored time reduction variation count 2 area may also not be cleared (initialized) and its value may be maintained. In addition, in the case of machines that have a probability variable state of the number cut type (ST), in order to avoid disadvantageous to the gaming hall side, special figure fluctuating display games (special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game) in the variable probability condition are ) may also be maintained at its value without being cleared (initialized), in which the high probability variation number area (ST counter) stores the number of high probability variation corresponding to the remaining number of executions. In addition, for machines that have a limit on the number of successive jackpots (or the number of successive wins described below), the number of successive jackpots may be The jackpot number area where is stored may also not be cleared (initialized) and its value may be maintained.

Next, a command at the time of power outage recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the special game processing etc. described later is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A104
9), the process moves to step A1050.

Note that the RAM initialization command sent in step A1047 and the power outage recovery command sent in step A1049 include a model designation command that indicates the type of gaming machine, and a pending special drawing 1 and 2 command. Decorative special figure 1 reserved number command and decorative special figure 2 reserved number command that indicate the number, probability information command that indicates the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and the presence or absence of time saving state, special figure fluctuation in the predetermined production mode It includes a performance number information command that indicates the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command that indicates that the power has been turned on.

Furthermore, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power outage recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information) indicating setting value information (setting information) that is information on the probability setting value (setting value) of the gaming machine 10. commands). The game control device 100 only needs to send the setting value information command to the production control device 300 once when the power is restored (turned on), and from then on, the production control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control the performance.

Note that the RAM initialization commands also include a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The production control device 300 that received the RAM initialization command, for example,
A customer waiting demonstration is displayed on the display device 41, and the RAM
Initialization (RAM clear) will be notified for 30 seconds. Further, the commands at the time of power restoration include a screen designation command that designates the display contents of the screen of the display device 41. In addition, the screen specified command is used for both special drawings 1 and 2 during normal processing (when neither fluctuation nor winning occurs).
, is a customer waiting demo command; otherwise, a recovery screen command may be used. Further, the command at the time of power restoration may include a command indicating the ceiling counter value in order to match the display of the number of fluctuations and the ceiling counter value as described above.

Next, it is determined whether the safety device is in operation (A1050). For example, if "1" indicating that the safety device is in operation is saved in the safety device in operation flag area as the safety device in operation flag, it can be determined that the safety device is in operation (safety device Active flag = 1). Then, if the safety device is in operation (the result of A1050 is "Y"), a command indicating that the safety device is in operation is sent to the production control device 300 (production control board). (A1051), the process moves to step A1052. If the safety device is not in operation (the result of A1050 is "N"), the process directly proceeds to step A1052.

Then, the information (value) of the flag register is saved (PUSH) to the stack area within the area (A
1052), executes a safety device information initialization process that initializes safety device information related to the safety device (safety device counter value, safety device operation information, old operation information, etc. described later) (A1053).
). Thereafter, the information in the flag register is restored (POP) (A1054). In addition, RAM
Except when the game is stopped due to an error (A1025-A1026), safety device information (safety device counter value, etc.) is unconditionally initialized (cleared) when the power is turned on, but a count continuation switch is provided to If you turn on the power while pressing the continuation switch, there is no need to initialize (clear) the safety device information.

In addition, as described later, when transitioning to safety device information initialization processing, the stack pointer is moved from the stack area in the area related to game control to the area related to safety device information, performance information, and performance display (display of performance information). Switch to outside stack area. At that time, since there is a possibility that the flags in the flag register (especially the zero flag) may change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer storage area of the RAM 111c, the information in the flag register is saved in advance in step A1052. put. The flag register is a flag in which each of the 8 bits takes a value of 0 or 1. Regarding the flag register, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-
Those disclosed in JP-A No. 233299, JP-A No. 2018-94101, etc. can be used.

Next, the gaming control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1055). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, the bit transposition pattern of the hardware random numbers generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. In this embodiment, the random number generation circuit generates the jackpot random number, the special symbol random number, the regular symbol hit random number, and the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 as random numbers that are updated only by hardware. These random numbers may be a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operating clock.

A bit transposition pattern is a method of replacing the bit arrangement of extracted random numbers (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). This is a pattern that determines the

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken, and the secrecy of the random number can be improved. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Alternatively, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

Next, the gaming control device 100 prohibits interruptions (A1056) and determines whether the game is stopped (A1057). If the safety device is activated (safety device activation flag = 1) or if a strong error 2 (described later) occurs that requires stopping the game (special pattern fluctuation display game, general pattern fluctuation display game, round game, etc.) If this occurs, it can be determined that the game is stopped.

If the game is not stopped (the result of A1057 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 saves (PUSH) the information (value) of the flag register to the stack area within the area (A1058),
Execute performance display editing processing to calculate performance information such as base value (ball output rate) (A1059
). Here, performance information (accessory object ratio, ball payout rate, etc.) may be calculated. Further, if there is an abnormality in the performance display work area (a part of the work area outside the area) related to performance information and its display (performance display), this may be cleared. After that, restore the flag register information (POP)
(A1060), and interrupts are permitted (A1061). In addition to cases where no error has occurred, if a weak error (described later) or strong error 1 (described later), which is an error other than strong error 2, has occurred, the game is not stopped and performance display editing processing is performed. Step A1058 including
- Processing of A1060 is executed. Note that a configuration is also possible in which the processes of steps A1058 to A1060 are not executed when a weak error or strong error 1 occurs.

As described later, when transitioning to performance display editing processing, the stack pointer is moved from the stack area within the area related to game control to the area outside the area related to safety device information, performance information, and performance display (display of performance information). Switch to stack area. At that time, when saving the stack pointer for game control in the stack pointer storage area of the RAM 111c, the flag of the flag register (
In particular, since there is a possibility that the zero flag may change, the information in the flag register is saved in advance in step A1058.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (the result of A1057 is "Y"), the game control device 100
, the interrupt is permitted without executing performance display editing processing, etc. (A1061). In other words, when a safety device is activated or a strong error 2 occurs, the performance display editing process (especially the base value calculation process during the performance display editing process) is not executed, so performance information such as the base value is It is not newly calculated and does not change. It should be noted that even if the strong error 2 occurs, a configuration is also possible in which the game is not stopped and the performance display editing process or the like is executed. Furthermore, by allowing interrupts, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) can be executed.

In this embodiment, errors are classified into three types: weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2. In addition, the production control device 300 that has received the error/fraud type command sets error notifications of different strengths corresponding to weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2 in the error/fraud setting process (B1316). Can be executed.

For example, the production control device 300 controls the volume of the error notification sound from the speaker, or the brightness (brightness) of the LED that emits light for error notification (the production LED of the board decoration device 46 or the frame decoration device 18). , weak error<strong error 1≦strong error 2. Note that the loudspeaker volume or the brightness of the LED for the strong error 1 and the strong error 2 may be the same. In addition, when a weak error occurs, the production control device 300 sets the volume of the notification sound to the volume (lower than the maximum volume) adjusted in the hall/player setting mode processing (B0011), and sets the volume of the notification sound to the volume (lower than the maximum volume), If this occurs, the volume of the notification sound may be set to the maximum volume.

A weak error is a shot ball out error in which a shot ball out switch signal is generated in response to a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal is generated in response to the lower tray 23 becoming full. Including overflow errors like. In the case of a weak error, the external information signal is not output to the external information terminal 71 (see FIG. 51A). Further, the weak error may include a switch abnormality error and a payout abnormality error in which a status signal indicating a payout abnormality is generated.

Strong error 1 is a frame opening error related to frame opening, and includes a glass frame opening error and a main body frame opening error (front frame opening error). In the case of strong error 1, a door/frame open signal (A9305) is output as an external information signal to the external information terminal 71 (see FIG. 51A).

Strong error 2 is a fraud-related error related to fraud, and it is preferable to stop the game, and includes magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, vibration fraud, abnormal discharge error, V passing error, big prize opening fraud, and general error. Including electronic fraud. In strong error 2, a security signal (A93) is used as an external information signal.
22) is output to the external information terminal 71 (see FIG. 51A). Further, the strong error 2 may include a remaining ball error. When strong error 2 occurs, the games (special figure fluctuation display game, regular figure fluctuation display game, round game, etc.) are stopped, and it can be determined that the game is stopped (A1
057). Also, when strong error 2 occurs, the same as when the safety device is activated,
As a game, it is possible to generate a game stop state (game impossible state, game prohibited state) in which special figure fluctuation display games, regular figure fluctuation display games, round games (games during jackpots or small wins), etc. cannot be executed. .

After step A1061, the gaming control device 100 determines whether a power outage has occurred (A1062). If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1062 is "N"), the process returns to step A1056. As a result, until a power outage occurs, steps A1056-
The loop process of A1062 is repeated. Then, until a power outage occurs, performance information such as the base value can be repeatedly calculated in the performance display editing process (A1059) unless the game is stopped, that is, unless a safety device is activated or a strong error 2 occurs.

Note that the repeating cycle of the loop process is considerably shorter than the interrupt cycle of the timer interrupt (a predetermined time cycle, for example, 4 msec), so the performance display editing process is executed many times during the interrupt cycle. Therefore, when a game ball wins or a change in the number of ejected balls (game ball enters the outlet 30b), performance information such as the base value can change immediately.

When a power outage occurs (result of A1062 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 starts processing when a power outage occurs, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1063), and outputs off data to all output ports ( A1064). After that, power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in power failure inspection area 1 (A1065), and power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in power failure inspection area 2 (A1065).
A1066). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM (A1067), and the calculated checksum is further saved in the checksum area (A1068). Finally, execute processing to prohibit access to RWM (A106
9) Wait until the power to the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power failure, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power failure has been correctly backed up. This can be determined at the time of reinsertion.

The main processing has been explained above, but for example, steps A1056-A106
If the setting key switch and RAM initialization switch are turned on during the process of step 2, the gaming machine It may be possible to switch to a setting variable state (setting change mode) any number of times while 10 is activated.

[Example of RAM area configuration]
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the configuration (memory map in address space) of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 6, from the start address of the RAM 111c, an internal work area, an unused area, an internal stack area, an unused area, an external work area, an unused area, and an external stack area are arranged in order in the address space. . Unused area between the work area inside the area and the stack area inside the area (stack area for game control, stack area for inside the area), and unused area between the work area outside the area and the stack area outside the area (stack area for outside the area) There may be no area.

The in-area work area (game control work area, first area) of the RAM is a work area for game control that is read and written by the in-area program and read by the out-area program. The work areas within the area are the probability setting value area, test signal output data area (including the area of test signal output data related to errors), random number area, switch control area, segment area, power failure test area 1, power failure test area 2, and check. In addition to the thumb area, there is a safety device activation flag area that indicates whether the safety device is activated (actuated or not), and one timer interrupt (for example, 4 msec).
c) includes an acquired game ball number area that stores the number of acquired game balls acquired as prize balls.

The out-of-area work area (second area) of the RAM is an area that is read and written by an out-of-area program and read by an in-area program. The out-of-area work area includes a safety device counter area that stores the safety device counter value (number of difference balls + initial value) corresponding to the number of difference balls, and safety device operation information that stores safety device operation information corresponding to the state of the safety device. The area includes an old operation information area for storing old operation information, and is capable of storing safety device information related to the safety device. Safety device counter area (
3 byte size) is basically not read by the program within the area, but when transmitting information on the safety device counter value or the number of difference balls to the production control device 300 with the difference ball command, it is read by the program within the area. Sometimes referred to as In this embodiment, the safety device counter value is a value obtained by adding a predetermined initial value (100,000) to the number of difference balls in proportion to the number of difference balls (safety device counter value = number of difference balls + 100,000). However, the safety device counter value is not limited to this as long as it is associated with the number of difference balls and indicates the number of difference balls. Note that by separating the out-of-area work area from the in-area work area, program development efficiency can be improved, and it is also easier to initialize these areas separately.

Further, the extra-area work area includes a performance display work area related to performance information and performance display, and is capable of storing performance information, information related to performance display, and the like. In addition, the out-of-area work area may store information related to test signals and information related to error monitoring. In addition,
In the extra-area work area, there is a safety device-related work area related to safety device information (including the safety device counter area, safety device operation information area, and old operation information area), and performance display work related to performance information and performance display. The regions may be clearly divided and arranged, or may be arranged in a mixed manner.

The out-of-area stack area is shared between processing related to performance information and performance display and processing related to safety devices. Further, the extra-region stack area is also used when performing processing related to test signals and processing related to error monitoring.

Note that the in-area program (in-area processing program) and the out-of-area program (out-of-area processing program) are arranged in this order from the top address side within the address space of the ROM 111b, and the area for the in-area program and the out-of-area program are arranged in this order. They are distinguished by placing an unused area between them. The program in the ROM area includes a game control program, game control data, etc., and includes a main program corresponding to main processing (FIGS. 5A to 5C) and an interrupt processing program corresponding to timer interrupt processing described later. An unused area may be sandwiched between the area for the game control program and the area for game control data (data area). A subroutine of a main program or an interrupt processing program is basically an in-area program (unless otherwise specified, it is an in-area program), but it may be an out-of-area program in exceptional cases. The out-of-area programs in the ROM include a safety device information initialization program corresponding to safety device information initialization processing, a performance display editing processing program corresponding to performance display editing processing,
It includes an extra-area integration processing program corresponding to extra-area integration processing to be described later.

[Safety device information initialization process]
Next, details of the safety device information initialization process (A1053) in the main process will be explained. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of safety device information initialization processing. In the safety device information initialization process, the safety device counter area, safety device operation information area, and old operation information area are initialized or cleared, and safety device information such as the safety device counter value, safety device operation information, and old operation information is initialized. Set to value (initial information). Note that the safety device operation information is information indicating the current state, and the old operation information indicates the previous state (mainly one interrupt ago).

The gaming control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the outside work area (A1101), and sets the stack pointer to the start of the outside stack area as the value of the outside stack area (stack area for outside the area). Set an address value that indicates (
A1102). As a result, the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used is switched from the in-area stack area to the out-of-area stack area.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the information (value) of the register to the stack area outside the area (P
USH) (A1103). The registers to be saved may be only the registers to be protected (registers used in the safety device information initialization process), or all general-purpose registers may be saved. To save all general-purpose registers, save (PUSH) both register bank 0 and register bank 1.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 saves the initial value (100,000) in the safety device counter area, and the safety device counter value becomes the initial value (A1104). When the number of difference balls decreases from 0, such as when a jackpot does not occur, the safety device counter value (=number of difference balls + initial value) may be smaller than the initial value, so the initial value is set larger than 0. However, it can be any number other than 100,000. In addition, in this way, when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), the safety device counter value is initialized (cleared) so as not to be disadvantageous to the player, but if the special figure fluctuation display game is executed in a state other than the probability fluctuation state. The ceiling counter value indicating the number of times the power has been reset does not need to be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored unless the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on. When the safety device counter value (information regarding the number of difference balls) is initialized (cleared), the margin (tolerable range of the number of difference balls, number of difference balls) until the safety device is activated (occurrence of game stop state) regarding the number of difference balls is initialized (cleared). (limit) can be increased, which benefits the player.
On the other hand, as mentioned above, since the ceiling counter value is not cleared (initialized) when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), the remaining number of games (up to the ceiling) until the time saving state occurs does not change when the power is turned on. , which benefits the players. Then, safety device non-operation information (value 0) corresponding to the non-operation state (normal state) of the safety device is saved as safety device operation information in the safety device operation information area (A1105). Further, safety device non-operation information (value 0) is saved in the old operation information area as old operation information (A1106).

Next, the gaming control device 100 restores the saved register (A1107), loads it from the stack pointer storage area and sets the stack pointer (A1108), and ends the safety device information initialization process. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

In the safety device information initialization process described above, when information is written directly to the RAM without using registers, the registers are not saved/restored. In this case, the registers are not saved to RAM, so stack pointer related processing (A1101, A1102, A1103, A1
107, A1108) are also unnecessary. Further, saving/restoring the flag register (A1052, A1054) before and after the safety device information initialization process is no longer necessary.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the safety device counter value is 0 to 189999 (safety device counter = 0 to 189999), the safety device operation information is the non-operation state (operation advance notice) where the safety device is not activated (normal). safety device non-operation information (value 0) corresponding to the safety device status, activation warning status, or normal status that is not activated. When the safety device counter value is 190000 to 194999 (safety device counter = 190000 to 194999), the safety device activation information is the safety device activation notification information (value 1) corresponding to the activation notification state that foretells the activation of the safety device. Become.

Also, the safety device counter value is 195000 which is the counter reference value (safety device counter =
195000) and the game is not in a state where the game can be stopped, the safety device activation information is the safety device activation warning information (value 2) corresponding to the activation warning state that warns the activation of the safety device.
becomes. In this case, even if the difference ball number (= safe ball number - ejected ball number) reaches the difference ball standard value of 95,000, it is still a jackpot or a small hit, so the above condition (1) is met, but the condition ( This corresponds to the case where 2) is not satisfied and the operating conditions for the safety device are not satisfied.

Furthermore, when the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 (safety device counter = 195,000) and the game is stopped, the safety device activation information corresponds to an operating state in which the safety device is operating (operating state). Safety device operating information (value 3). In this case, the number of difference balls reaches the standard value of difference balls of 95,000, and it is neither a jackpot nor a small hit, so the above condition (1
This corresponds to a case where the operating conditions for the safety device are satisfied by both of ) and (2) being satisfied.

[Performance display editing process]
Next, details of the performance display editing process (A1059) in the main process will be explained.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of performance display editing processing.

The gaming control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the outside work area (A1201), and sets the start of the outside stack area (stack area for outside area) to the stack pointer as the value of the outside stack area. Set an address value that indicates (
A1202). As a result, the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used is switched from the in-area stack area to the out-of-area stack area.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves (PUSH) register information (values) for both register bank 0 and register bank 1 to the outside stack area (A1203). Here, it is preferable to save all general-purpose registers. Then, a validity judgment is executed to determine the validity of the performance display work area among the work areas outside the area, and if the work area is not valid and is abnormal, the performance display work area is initialized (including initial value setting). (A1204).

In the validity determination, if the value stored in the performance display work area is an impossible value in terms of design or deviates from the design value (outside a predetermined range), it can be determined that the value is not valid. For example, it is determined whether a specific value (for example, 5Ah) is stored in the performance display RAM initialized flag indicating that the performance display work area has been initialized, and division is used to calculate the base value. Determine whether the number that manages the progress of processing is within a predetermined range, determine whether the value of the switch counter is within the range of the number of monitored switches or less, and determine the display period management number that indicates the current display period. is within the range of the number of periods (0 to 3), and it is determined whether the total section number indicating the current total section is within the range of the number of sections (0 to 4). In this manner, in the validity determination, it is preferable to determine whether the value of the area used as a pointer to the data table is within a predetermined range. This can prevent the program from running out of control due to obtaining a value outside the range. Furthermore, since the validity is determined for each performance display editing process, it is effective.

In addition, since the validity judgment is executed every time the performance display editing process is executed, if the performance display work area is invalid, it can be initialized immediately, and abnormal performance display (abnormal base value etc.) can be prevented as much as possible.

Furthermore, when initializing the performance display work area (including initial value setting), areas other than the stack pointer storage area are initialized to protect the stack pointer storage area. Note that although the stack area outside the area is not initialized in this embodiment, it may be initialized. Even when the extra-area stack area is initialized, the values of registers saved in the extra-area stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the performance display work area is performed separately from the initialization of the intra-area work area (gaming control work area) and the intra-area stack area (gaming control stack area), so the intra-area work area and has no effect on the stack area within the area.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether it is the timing to switch the aggregation interval for aggregating the data (normal number of out balls, normal number of prize balls, etc.) that is the basis for calculating the base value (ball output rate). (A1205). A counting interval is set for the total number of out pitches (total number of ejected pitches, total number of outs) from the time the power is turned on, and each time the total number of out pitches reaches a plurality of predetermined numbers (for example, 60,000
each time the number increases), the aggregation interval is switched.

For example, the switching timing of the counting period is the timing when the total number of out pitches since the power is turned on reaches a predetermined number of 300, 60,300, 120,300, 180,300, etc. That is, the width of the aggregation section is basically 60,000 excluding the first first aggregation section,
1st counting section = 0 to 300 pieces, 2nd counting section = 300 to 60300 pieces, 3rd counting section = 6
0300 to 120300 pieces, 4th tally section = 120300 to 180300 pieces, 5th tally section = 180300 to 240300 pieces, etc. Aggregation section numbers indicating the first to fifth aggregation sections are 0 to 4, respectively, and the aggregation section number is maintained at 4 for the sixth and subsequent aggregation sections. Note that the current total section number is stored in the performance display work area.

When it is the switching timing of the counting section (the result of A1205 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 sets the switching of the counting section (A1206). In the aggregation interval switching setting,
A total out counter that counts the total number of out pitches (total number of outs), a normal out counter that counts the number of normal out pitches (normal number of outs), which is the number of out pitches (number of ejected pitches) within each counting interval, and each You can clear the regular award pitch counter that counts the number of regular award pitches, which is the total number of award pitches (number of acquired pitches) within the aggregation section, or set the final base value (or latest base value) of each aggregation section to the next aggregation section. Shift (move) to the base value storage area.

If it is not the timing to switch the aggregation interval (the result of A1205 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not there is a switch input to the input port to be monitored (A120).
7). In this embodiment, the input ports to be monitored are the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126 (see FIG. 3).

Here, the switch rising edge information (copied in step A9603 in FIG. 55) that has been copied to the performance display work area for each input port to be monitored is checked.
Store the copied switch rising edge information for each input port to be monitored 8
There is an area of bits. If the information on the rising edge of the switch for all input ports to be monitored is all 0, it can be determined that there is no input, and in other cases, it can be determined that there is input. Note that as switch rising edge information, unless masked during copying,
In input processing (A1303), bits corresponding to switches with new inputs (detected) are set to 1, and bits corresponding to switches with no new inputs are set to 0.

When the input port to be monitored has a switch input, the gaming control device 100 performs (A12)
07 is "Y"), the input of the switch corresponding to the switch counter (target switch) is checked to obtain input information (A1208). The target switches here are the lower large winning port switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning port switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, the starting port 1 switch 36a of the first starting winning port 36, The starting opening 2 switch 37a of the second starting winning opening 37 (normal variable winning device), the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35 (
A left winning port switch, a right winning port switch), an out ball detection switch 74, etc., can change the base value (or ball output rate) by detecting a game ball.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the target switch is within its valid period (A
1209). In addition, due to the occurrence of large prize winning hole fraud and general wire fraud, the big winning hole and the second starting prize hole 37
If the winning is invalid, that is, the big winning opening switch 38a, 39a or the starting opening 2 switch 37a
may not be valid. There are also switches that are always active, such as the first starting prize opening 36 and the out ball detection switch 74.

The gaming control device 100 determines that when the target switch is valid (if the result of A1209 is “
Y”), and determines whether there is an input to the target switch corresponding to the switch counter (A1
210). If the valid period of the target switch is not over (the result of A1209 is "N") or if there is no input to the target switch (the result of A1210 is "N"), the process moves to step A1218.

The gaming control device 100 determines that when there is an input to the target switch (the result of A1210 is “Y”)
), clears the input information (1 bit) of the bit corresponding to the target switch (A1211),
It is determined whether or not it is in the normal base state (A1212). The normal base state (low base state) is a period in which the base value can be calculated and updated, and is the normal gaming state in this embodiment.

When the gaming control device 100 is in the normal base state (normal gaming state), (A121
If the result of step 2 is "Y"), and the target switch is a switch to which prize balls are awarded, by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the target switch, the total number of prize balls in the aggregation interval is calculated as the normal prize ball number. The number is updated (A1213). Next, by adding 1 when the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, the normal out ball number (normal out number, normal ejected ball number), which is the number of out balls within the counting interval, is updated (A1214 ). Next, when the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, the total number of out balls (total number of outs, total number of ejected balls) is updated by adding 1 (A1215).

In addition, in this embodiment, the out ball detection switch 74 detects all the game balls ejected from the game area 32 (that is, all the game balls that have passed through the winning opening or the out opening 30b). Not only the game ball that entered the out port 30b, but also the game ball that entered the winning hole (first starting winning hole 36, second starting winning hole 37, big winning hole, or general winning hole 35) are shown in the figure. The out ball is guided to the out ball detection switch 74 through a path or the like that does not cover the ball, and is detected.

When the gaming control device 100 is not in the normal base state which is the normal gaming state (A121
2), only the total number of out pitches is updated without updating the number of normal award pitches or the number of normal out pitches (A1215). Therefore, in a high base state that is not a normal base state (second game state, time saving state, variable probability state, or special game state), the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls are not updated, and the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls are not updated. The base value calculated from the number (normal number of award pitches ÷ normal number of out pitches) is not updated and does not change. Note that it is also possible to omit the determination process regarding the normal base state in step A1212, and to make the base value updateable (changeable) as the ball payout rate in all gaming states.

Next, the gaming control device 100 updates the switch counter by +1 in order to change the target switch to the next one in the next performance display editing process (A1216). Note that due to the loop processing in the main processing, the performance display editing process is executed at time intervals (for example, several microseconds) that are considerably shorter than the interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle, for example, 4 msec) of the timer interrupt.
Therefore, during the interrupt period, the performance display editing process is repeatedly executed, and the switch counter (e.g., 0 to 7) covers all switch bits (e.g., bits 0 to 7) for each monitored input port. . Also, the switch counter will be 0 after the final value (for example 7).
, and the switch's input begins checking for the next monitored input port. For example, after the input of the switch is first checked for the third input port 124,
The input of the switch is then checked with respect to the fourth input port 126.

On the other hand, if there is no switch input to any of the monitoring target input ports (the result of A1207 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes a base value calculation process (predetermined process) for calculating the base value. (A1217). Note that the input port to be monitored may not have switch input from the beginning. On the other hand, even if some or all of the monitored input ports initially have switch inputs, after the switch inputs have been checked for all monitored input ports, the inputs of the target switches where the inputs were Since the information has been cleared (A1211), there is no switch input to all monitored input ports.

In the base value calculation process, the base value is the ratio of the number of normal award pitches to the number of normal out pitches, and is calculated as the number of normal award pitches divided by the number of normal out pitches. Therefore, starting winning hole (starting winning hole 36
, normal variable winning device 37), when a ball enters the big winning hole or the general winning hole 35, as a first step, the winning hole switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a, which award the prize ball, 3
The number of normally awarded balls is updated and changed by the input (detection) of 9a, and the base value is changed, and the number of normal out balls is updated and changed by the input (detection) of the out ball detection switch 74 as a second step. Base value changes. That is, when one game ball enters the winning hole, the base value will change (will be affected) in two stages. When a ball enters the out port 30b opened on the game board 30, the number of out balls is updated and changed by the input (detection) of the out ball detection switch 74, and the base value also changes. On the other hand, when a ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 34, the number of normal award balls and the number of normal out balls are not updated and do not change depending on the ball entering, so the base value is also maintained unchanged. Ru. Even if a ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 34, the number of normal prize balls is not updated because no prize balls are awarded.

The base value is output as a performance display to the performance display device 152 by the processing of steps A1619 to A1625 of the output processing, regardless of whether there is a change or not. However, when the safety device is activated and the game is stopped, or when the strong error 2 occurs and the game is stopped, the performance display device 152 outputs off data and turns off.

As a special example, the base value calculation may be executed only during the real-time value display period in which the real-time value (bL.) of the base value is displayed, and in this special example, the calculation of the base value may be performed until the real-time value display period arrives. The number of normal award pitches and the number of normal out pitches are updated, but the base value is not calculated and does not change.

After step A1216 or A1217, the gaming control device 100 restores the saved register (A1218), loads it from the stack pointer storage area and sets the stack pointer (A1219), and ends the performance display editing process. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

In addition, in FIG. 8, the process of step A1217 is executed immediately after step A1214, and the number of normal winning pitches or the number of normal out pitches is updated without waiting for the input check of all the switches of the input port to be monitored. A configuration in which the base value calculation process is performed immediately after the calculation is also possible.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the gaming control device 100 first specifies register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing is equivalent to saving the registers used in main processing. Note that when timer interrupt processing is started, interrupts are automatically disabled.

Next, the gaming control device 100 receives input from various sensors and switches, receives signals,
That is, input processing for reading the status of each input port is executed (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirmation flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), a probability setting change/confirmation process is executed to change or confirm the probability setting value (A1305).

When the game control device 100 is neither changing probability settings nor checking probability settings (A130
4 result is "N"), output for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (for example, big prize opening solenoid 39b), drive control of LEDs (light emission control), etc., based on output data set in various processes. Processing is executed (A1306). Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal can be output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permitted state.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process that outputs a command (such as a payout command) set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1
307). After that, it is monitored whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a, and error monitoring (the front frame or glass frame is open). (A1308).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the game is stopped (A1309). It can be determined that the game is being stopped when the safety device is activated (safety device activation flag = 1) or when a strong error 2 that requires stopping the game occurs.

When the game is not stopped (the result of A1309 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the special figure game process (A1310), the regular figure game process (A1311), and the segment LED editing process (A1312). Thereafter, the processing from step A1313 onwards is executed. In addition,
In addition to when no error occurs at all, when weak errors and strong errors 1 occur, special pattern game processing (A1310), general pattern game processing (A1311), and segment LED editing processing (A1312) are performed. Execute.

In the segment LED editing process, a plurality of segment LEDs constituting the collective display device 50
Settings related to driving a part of (memory display section, round display section, etc.: LED lamps D3-D7, D11-D17), etc. are executed. Note that another part of the collective display device 50 (variable display section: L
Settings related to driving the ED lamps D1, D2, D8, D10, D18) are executed in the symbol variation control process (A2621, A2623, A7615). Settings related to driving another part of the collective display device 50 (probability state display section: LED lamp D9), etc.
A1048) etc.

When the game is stopped (the result of A1309 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the special pattern game process (A1310), the general pattern game process (A1311), and the segment LED editing process (A1312). The process proceeds to step A1313 and subsequent steps. In this way, when the safety device is activated or when the strong error 2 occurs and the game is stopped, the special pattern game processing (A1310) and the general pattern game processing (A1311) are not executed, so the number of reserved special drawings (A2906, A4611) and the number of reserved ordinary figures does not change. On the other hand, weak error and strong error 1
When this occurs, the special figure game process (A1310) and the general figure game process (A1311) are executed without the game being stopped, so the number of reserved special figures (A2906, A4611) and the number of reserved regular figures are +1. It can be changed by updating (when a hold occurs) or -1 update (when a hold is extinguished).

In addition, depending on the type of error such as weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2, special figure game processing (A1310), general figure game processing (A1311), and segment LED editing processing (A13
A configuration in which some of 12) are executed and the others are not executed is also possible. For example, when strong error 2 occurs, only segment LED editing processing may be executed.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 transmits safety device activation information corresponding to the state of the safety device to the performance control device 300 as a production command, and executes safety device related processing that can set a safety device operating flag (A1313). . Then, a magnet fraud monitoring process is executed to check the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and determine whether there is any abnormality (A1314
). Furthermore, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1315).

After that, the gaming control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1316). Next, abnormal discharge monitoring processing is executed to monitor abnormal discharge from the big prize opening (A1317). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, abnormal discharge of the special variable prize winning device 39 is detected based on inputs from the big prize opening switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning prize opening switch), and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 in the special variable winning device 39. is monitored, and if abnormal discharge occurs, an abnormal discharge flag is set. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the big winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 is transferred to the specific area switch 7.
2 (V prize opening switch) or the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 and is discharged.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes external information editing processing to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1318). Then, as in step A1309, it is determined whether the game is stopped (A1319).

If the game is not stopped (the result of A1319 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 saves the flag register to the stack area within the area (A1320), and updates the safety device counter value (
Executes out-of-area integration processing that performs calculation of the number of difference balls) and display control of the performance display device 152 (
A1321). Thereafter, the flag register is restored (A1322), and the timer interrupt processing ends. If the safety device is not operating and strong error 2 has not occurred, the game is not stopped, and the processes of steps A1320 to A1322, including the out-of-area integration process, are executed.

In addition, as will be described later, when moving to the outside-area integration process, the stack pointer is switched from the in-area stack area related to game control to the out-area stack area. At that time, since there is a possibility that the flags in the flag register (especially the zero flag) may change when saving the stack pointer for game control in the stack pointer storage area of the RAM 111c, step A1320
Save the flag register in advance.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (the result of A1319 is "Y"), the game control device 100
, the timer interrupt processing is ended without executing the out-of-area integration processing or the like. In other words, when the safety device is activated (safety device activation flag = 1) or when strong error 2 occurs, the out-of-area integration process is not executed, so the safety device counter value is not updated and the base value is The display contents of the performance display such as the following are not updated. This makes it possible to omit unnecessary control while the game is stopped.

In addition, unlike the above, even if strong error 2 occurs, the game will not be stopped, but the special figure game processing (A
1310), general figure game processing (A1311), segment LED editing processing (A1312)
A configuration that executes this is also possible. Further, even if a strong error 2 occurs, a configuration is also possible in which out-of-area integration processing or the like is executed.

Furthermore, when returning from timer interrupt processing, the interrupt disabled state and register bank specification are automatically restored, but depending on the CPU used, interrupts may be enabled after external information editing processing. It is also possible to perform processing to return the register bank designation to register bank 0.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output processing (A1306) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) will be explained. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

The gaming control device 100 first resets the output port 135 by outputting off data to the output port 135 (segment output port) (see FIG. 3) that outputs segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601 ). Subsequently, off output data is set for all solenoids (big prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b, lever solenoid 86b, general electric solenoid 37c) (A1602). Then, as in step A1309 and the like, it is determined whether the game is stopped (A1603). It can be determined that the game is being stopped when the safety device is activated (safety device activation flag = 1) or when a strong error 2 that requires stopping the game occurs.

When the game is not stopped (the result of A1603 is "N"), the game control device 100 outputs the data of the big prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b, lever solenoid 86b, and general electric solenoid 37c to the solenoid output port 134. Combine the data (A1604).
Then, data is output to the solenoid output port 134 (A1605). If the game is stopped (result of A1603 is "Y"), nothing is done, the process moves to step A1605, and off data (A1602) is output to the solenoid output port 134. As a result, when the game is in a stopped state, all solenoids stop operating, and the big prize opening, specific area 86,
The normal variable prize winning device 37 and the like are closed to be in a closed state. In this way, in the game stop state, the big prize opening is closed and round games (games during jackpots or small wins) cannot be executed.

Then, the gaming control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 by +1 in the range of 0 to 3 (it adds only 1, but after 3 it becomes 0). (A1606). Furthermore, L corresponding to the value of the digit counter
Obtain digit output data to the ED digit line (A1607). Then, the acquired digit output data and external information data are combined (A1608), and the combined data is output to the digit output/external information output port 136 (A1609).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets off data as segment output data to the segment line (A1610). Then, set the output data to prohibit firing (A161
1). Furthermore, as in step A1603, it is determined whether the game is stopped (A
1612).

If the game is not stopped (the result of A1612 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 loads segment output data from the segment area in the RAM 111c corresponding to the value of the digit counter to the segment line (A1613), and fires the segment output data. Set the permission output data (A1
614), and outputs the loaded segment output data to the output port 135 for segment output (A1615). Note that this segment area may be included in the intra-area work area (game control work area).

In this way, when the game is not stopped, each time the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3, a new digit line is selected and the 8 segments of the digit that this digit line connects are Segment output data is output to the line. Digits 0 to 3 (digits 0 to 3) are selected sequentially, and a dynamic drive method (dynamic lighting control) is applied to the collective display device 50.
is realized.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (the result of A1612 is "Y"), the game control device 100
, the off data (A1610) is output to the output port 135 for segment output (A1615) without performing the processing in steps A1613 and A1614. As a result, the collective display device 50 is turned off in the game stop state when the safety device is activated (safety device activation flag = 1) or when the strong error 2 occurs. As a result, the special symbol variation display game and the regular symbol variation display game cannot be executed in the game stop state. And the batch display device 50
The player who sees this can recognize that the game is stopped, that a safety device has been activated, or that a strong error 2 (fraud error) has occurred.

Next, the gaming control device 100 loads and synthesizes the external information data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1616), and further synthesizes the synthesized external information data with the output data of firing permission or firing prohibition (A1617). ), and outputs the finally synthesized data to the external information/launch permission signal output port 137 (A1618). Note that here, if the game is not stopped, the output data is to allow firing (A1614), and if the game is stopped, the output data is to prohibit firing (stop firing) (A1611). As a result, in the game stop state when the safety device is activated or strong error 2 has occurred, firing of game balls from the ball launcher is prohibited, while in the game stop state If not, firing of game balls from the ball firing device is permitted. It should be noted that even in the game stop state, it is possible to permit the shooting of game balls from the ball firing device and not prohibit shooting (stopping the shooting).

Next, the gaming control device 100 resets the output port 141 by outputting off data to the output port 141 (segment output port 2) that outputs segment data of the performance display device (LED) 152 (A1619). Next, the value of digit counter 2 for sequentially scanning the digit lines of performance display device 152 is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3 (only 1 is added, but after 3 it is updated to 0) (A1620) . Furthermore, digit output data to the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of digit counter 2 is obtained (A1621). and,
Output the acquired digit output data to the output port 142 (digit output port 2) (
A1622).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game is stopped, as in step A1603 and the like (A1623). If the game is not stopped (result of A1623 is "N"),
Segment output data is loaded from the performance display device segment area in the RAM 111c corresponding to the value of digit counter 2 (A1624). The performance display device segment area is included in a performance display work area related to performance information and its display (performance display). Then, the loaded segment output data is output to the output port 141 (segment output port 2) for the performance display device 152 (A1625), and then the output process is ended.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (the result of A1623 is "Y"), the game control device 100
, the output process ends without executing steps A1624 and A1625. Therefore, when the safety device is activated and the game is stopped (safety device activated flag = 1) or when the game is stopped due to strong error 2, the segment output data in the performance display device segment area cannot be output to the output port 141, the off data of step A1619 is output as is to the output port 141 for the performance display device 152. In this case, when the value of the digit counter 2 goes around in the range of 0 to 3, the performance display device 152 displays all the LEs.
When D is forcibly turned off and hidden, the person in charge of the game hall or the staff who sees the performance display device 152 will notice that the game is stopped, a safety device has been activated, or a strong error 2 (fraud error). ) can be recognized as occurring.

Further, even if a strong error 2 occurs, a configuration is also possible in which the game is not stopped and the processing in steps A1624 and A1625 is executed.

[Winning port switch/condition monitoring processing]
Next, the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process (Figure 9)
) will be explained in detail. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first clears the acquired game ball number area included in the intra-area work area to 0 (A2001). As a result, the acquired game ball number area becomes an area for storing the acquired game ball number, which is the number (total) of prize balls acquired within one interruption (within a predetermined time period). Note that the number of acquired game balls is equal to the increase in the number of safe balls within one interruption. Then, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to the winning opening switch 39a in the winning opening (special variable winning device 39) is prepared (A2002). Then, it monitors whether or not there is any fraudulent winnings in the University's winning opening even though the winning opening is not open, and executes a fraud & winning monitoring process that detects normal winnings (
A2003).

After that, the gaming control device 100 prepares the winning hole monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower big winning hole switch 38a in the lower big winning hole (special variable winning device 38) (A2004). Then, fraud & winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor whether there is any illegal winning in the lower winning opening even though the lower winning opening is not open and to detect a normal winning (A2005).

Then, the gaming control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table corresponding to the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 (A2006). Then, fraud & winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor fraudulent winnings and detect normal winnings (A2007). Next, prepare a winning slot monitoring table for the winning slot switch that allows you to win at any time and does not require fraud monitoring (A20
08). The winning opening switches that can always win a prize include the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the general winning opening 35, and the like.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a winning number counter update process to update the winning number (
A2009). Then, a status scan counter is updated for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals whose status should be monitored is to be monitored this time (A2010). The state scan counter is updated in the range 0 to 3.

After that, the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine status check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (A2012).
.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, it is determined that the status is based on the abnormality detection signal output due to an occurrence such as a disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormal error ) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shoot ball out error) based on the shot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status is based on the abnormal payout status signal (abnormal payout error). monitoring is set. In this way, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 monitors weak errors.

Next, the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2013). Then, a game machine status check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (A2014).

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame open error) can be monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (body frame opening error, front frame opening error) based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. Additionally, if the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on frame radio fraud signals (frame radio fraud) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on touch switch signals is set. is set.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2015). Then, if the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (A2015
(the result is "N"), the process moves to step A2017.

Furthermore, if the value of the error scan counter is 0, the gaming control device 100 (A2
015 is "Y"), the payout busy signal check process is executed to set the busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control ( A2016), the process moves to step A2017.

Note that the process of step A2016 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated every timer interrupt is 0, so it is executed once every four timer interrupts. In other words, if a timer interrupt occurs every 4ms, A201 will occur every 16ms.
6 processing will be performed.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a V passage timing monitoring process to monitor whether the game ball has passed the specific area switch 72 at an inappropriate timing (A2017). In the V passing timing monitoring process, if the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 is generated at an inappropriate timing, a V passing error is determined.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a remaining ball monitoring process to monitor whether there are any game balls remaining in the specific area switch 72 (A2018), and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

The V passage timing monitoring process and the remaining ball monitoring process in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process are necessary for a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed machine (1+2 type machine) like this embodiment, and are not required for a normal 1 type pachinko machine. It may not be necessary for the machine.

In the gaming machine status check process executed in steps A2012, A2014, etc. in the prize opening switch/state monitoring process, a status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is acquired, and if the signal to be checked is off, the target A state off command is obtained and transmitted to the production control device 300 as a production command. In the gaming machine state check process, when the signal to be checked is on, the target state on command is acquired and transmitted to the performance control device 300 as a performance command.

If the state on command is an error command, the production control device 300 is made to start error notification. As the state-on command that causes the production control device 300 to start error notification, there are commands that correspond to payout errors (included in weak errors) related to payout of game balls such as shot ball out error, overflow error, and payout abnormal error. There are commands corresponding to frame opening errors (included in strong error 1) such as glass frame opening error and body frame opening error, and commands corresponding to frame radio wave fraud errors (included in strong error 2).

[Fraud & prize monitoring processing]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fraud and winning monitoring process. The fraud & winning monitoring process is performed at steps A2003 and A2 in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.
005, executed at A2007.

Fraud & winning monitoring processing is performed using the lower large winning opening switch 38a in the special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning opening switch 39a in the special variable winning device 39, and the winning opening switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning device 37. ). Regarding the second starting prize opening (normal variable winning device 37) and the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38, 39), it is easy to commit fraud by forcibly opening the opening/closing member, inserting game balls, and paying out the prize balls. Therefore, in addition to detecting winnings, fraud is also monitored.

The gaming control device 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch to be monitored for errors (A2101), and determines whether or not it is in the fraud monitoring period (A2102).
For example, the fraud monitoring period is a period in which the winning slot switch that is subject to error monitoring does not originally detect game balls. This is a period other than the gaming state.

Then, if the game control device 100 is in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “
Y”), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (A2103). If there is no input to the target prize winning port switch (the result of A2103 is "N"), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). In addition, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2103 is "Y"), the number of fraudulent winnings for the target is updated by +1 (A2104), and the number of fraudulent winnings after addition is used to determine the occurrence of fraud for the monitored target. It is determined whether the number is greater than or equal to the number (for example, 5) (A2105).

The reason why the judgment number is set to 5 is that, for example, when the grand prize opening that is in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball gets caught in the door member of the big prize opening, and the game ball has passed the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent cases such as winning a prize or noise in the signal from being judged as fraudulent, and to prevent it from being easily judged as an error even though it is not fraudulent.

Then, if the game control device 100 does not exceed the determined number (the result of A2105 is “
N''), prepare a winning slot monitoring table for the target winning slot switch (A2110). Also,
If the number is equal to or greater than the determined number (result of A2105 is "Y"), the number of fraudulent winnings is kept at the number of fraudulent winnings determined to occur (A2106), and an initial value (for example, 60000ms) is set in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area.
) (A2107).

Next, the gaming control device 100 prepares the target fraud occurrence command as a production command (
A2108), and further prepares a fraudulent winning occurrence flag as a fraudulent flag (A2109)
. Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “N
”), prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2110), and executes a winning number counter update process for setting prize balls (A2111). Details of the win number counter update process will be described later.

Then, the gaming control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112).
, determines whether updating of the notification timer is permitted (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (the result of A2113 is "N"), the fraud and winning monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, if updating of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is "Y"), if the target notification timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning winning device 37. In addition, if there are two winning opening switches in one special variable winning device (big winning opening), update of the notification timer is permitted if one winning opening switch is subject to error monitoring, and If the winning port switch is on the other side, it will not be allowed. As a result, regarding fraudulent notifications for one special variable winning device, the notification timer will be updated twice as often, and the specified time (for example, 60
This prevents the time from running out at half the time (000ms).

After that, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (A211
5) If the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. Also, if the value of the notification timer is 0 (
If the result of A2115 is "Y"), that is, the time is up or the time has already expired, prepare the target illegal cancellation command as a production command (A2116), and prepare an illegal winning cancellation flag as the illegal flag (A2116). A2117). Then, the value of the notification timer is 0
It is determined whether or not it is the moment when (A2118).

The gaming control device 100 determines when the notification timer value reaches 0 (result of A2118 is "Y"), that is, when the notification timer value reaches 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process. clears the target number of fraudulent winnings (A2119).

In addition, after the processing of step A2119 is completed, or if the value of the notification timer is not at the moment when it becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 performs the fraud & winning monitoring processing before the previous time. If the value of the notification timer becomes 0, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (the result of A2120 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 ends the fraud & winning monitoring process. Also,
If the values of the prepared fraud flag and the target fraud flag area do not match (the result of A2120 is "N"), save the prepared fraud flag in the target fraud flag area (A2121),
Performance command setting processing is executed (A2122). Thereafter, the fraud and prize monitoring process is ended.

Through the above processing, a fraud occurrence command is sent to the production control device 300 when fraud occurs, a fraud cancellation command is sent to the production control device 300 when fraud is canceled, and the start and end of fraud notification is set. The Rukoto.

[Winning number counter update process]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for updating the winning number counter. The winning number counter update process is executed in step A2009 of the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG. 11 and step A2111 of the fraud & winning monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the game is stopped (A2201). It can be determined that the game is being stopped when the safety device is activated (safety device activation flag = 1) or when a strong error 2 that requires stopping the game occurs.

If the game is not stopped (the result of A2201 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 obtains the number of winning opening switches to be monitored from the winning opening monitoring table (A2202), and determines whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch. It is determined whether or not (A2203). In the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, the number of winning balls, the address of the winning number counter area 1, the address of the winning number counter area 2, etc. are defined for each winning opening switch to be monitored. If there is no input (A
The result of 2203 is "N"), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A22
15), it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2216).

On the other hand, if there is an input to the target prize winning port switch, the game control device 100 (A220
3 result is "Y"), load the number of acquired game balls from the number of acquired game balls area (A2204), add the number of prize balls corresponding to the target winning opening switch to the number of acquired game balls (A2205), and add The latter value is saved in the acquired game ball number area (A2206). As a result, the number of acquired game balls stored in the number of acquired game balls area is updated for each prize opening switch, and the number of acquired game balls is finally equal to the number (total) of prize balls acquired within one interrupt. Become.

The acquired game ball number area is located in the work area within the area, and is written in the winning number counter update processing program (part of the area program), and is written in the winning number counter update processing program (part of the area program), and is written in the winning ball confirmation processing program (part of the outside area program), which will be described later. ) only reads it. Note that even if input is made to all the winning opening switches at the same time, the total value of prize balls is less than 255 (1 byte), so the upper limit is not checked for the number of acquired game balls.

Next, the gaming control device 100 loads the value of the target number of winnings counter area 1 (A220
7) Update the loaded value by +1 (A2208). Furthermore, it is determined whether an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2209). The winning number counter area 1 has a size of 2 bytes (0 to 65535).

If no overflow has occurred (the result of A2209 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2210). After the process of step A2210 is completed, or if an overflow occurs (result of A2209 is "Y"), the value of the target prize winning number counter area 2 is loaded (A2211).

After that, the gaming control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2212), and determines whether an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2213). If no overflow occurs (result of A2213 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (A2214). The winning number counter area 2 has a size of 1 byte (0 to 255).

After completing the process of step A2214, or when an overflow occurs (the result of A2213 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 updates the table address to the address of the next record (A2215). Then, it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has ended (A2216).

If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (the result of A2216 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch in step A2203.
Return to processing. Also, if monitoring of all switches is completed (the result of A2216 is "Y")
), the winning number counter update process ends. As a result, the processes of steps A2203 to A2216 are repeated until monitoring of all switches is completed, and the number of won game balls, which is the number (total) of prize balls obtained within one interrupt, is obtained, and the number of winning game balls within one interrupt is obtained. Based on the winnings in each winning opening (each winning area), the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated to store winning information.

If the game is being stopped (the result of A2201 is "Y"), the game control device 100 does nothing and ends the win number counter update process. As a result, when the game is stopped, the detection of game balls with the winning slot switch is disabled, the number of won game balls is not updated, and the number of winnings counter areas 1 and 2 are not updated, so winning information is not stored and no prizes are awarded. You can't even get a ball (it won't be paid out). In addition, the payout of prize balls based on the winning information stored before entering the game stop state (that is, when the detection of game balls with the winning opening switch is effective) continues even in the game stop state.

Note that the winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out prize balls, and the payout command has not yet been sent. Winning data corresponding to the winning balls that do not exist is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 constitutes a prize ball command counter capable of storing information regarding prize ball commands.

The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (planned number of payouts) generated by winning into the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). Winning data corresponding to prize balls that are used in the area and for which the main prize ball signal generation processing has not been performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main prize ball signal counter that can store information regarding the main prize ball signal.

Each of these winning number counter areas is provided with a winning number counter area according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, 1 winning ball, 6 winning balls, 15 winning balls). Based on the winnings in the winning openings, the count number in the corresponding winnings counter area is incremented by 1. In other words, it is possible to store information on winnings in units of winnings in the winning opening. Note that the winning number counter area 1 (2 bytes) is allocated a wider area than the winning winning number counter area 2 (1 byte) so that more winning data can be stored. This is because, while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, transmission of the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200, which is the destination, and more unsent messages may be sent. This is because data may be accumulated.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be explained. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2
401). The probability setting value here is stored in a probability setting value area included in the intra-area work area of the RAM 111c.

The game control device 100 determines that when the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is “
Y''), sets probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value (A2402), and outputs it to the performance display device 152 via the drivers 150a and 150b (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (result of A2401 is "N"), lights-off data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the driver 150a, 15 is displayed on the performance display device 152.
Output via 0b (A2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of the probability setting value for display displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among hall personnel such as game hall managers and staff, if the probability setting values are different but the jackpot probability (and small winning probability) is the same, the display probability setting value will be changed to the jackpot probability ( and small hit probability). That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same jackpot probability (and small win probability).

Next, the gaming control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 1 set in step A1037.
It is 28ms (predetermined time). Next, the on-data of the security signal is sent to the external information terminal 71 to notify an abnormality to an external device (such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer)).
(A2406). Note that at this point, other signals such as the jackpot signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in an OFF state.

After that, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (A2407
If the result is "N"), that is, the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change/confirmation process is ended without doing anything.

When the probability setting changing flag is set, the gaming control device 100 executes (A2407)
If the result is "Y"), that is, the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not this is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (A2408). If this is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being updated unintentionally if the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

When the game control device 100 is not processing the first timer interrupt after turning on the power, (A240
8), it is determined whether there is an input to the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2
409). If there is no input to the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is input, the gaming control device 100 performs (A2409
result is "Y"), the working setting value in the working setting value area (RAM 111c or register) is updated by +1 within the possible range, and the probability setting in the probability setting value area is updated in accordance with the working setting value. The value is updated by +1 (A2410). Thereby, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. Thereafter, the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. Note that when entering the setting change mode, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value subtracted value) may be stored. Note that if the working setting value is 5 (probability setting value 6) and is updated by +1, the working setting value can be returned to 0 (probability setting value 1). Therefore, the probability setting values 1 to 6 can be repeatedly updated by +1 and switched. In addition, the possible range of the work setting value is, for example, 0 to 1 or 0 to 5 in the case of a multi-step setting where there are multiple probability setting values, but in the case of a single-step setting, it is 0.
Only. In the case of multi-stage setting, the working setting value and the probability setting value are updated to different values each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, but in the case of single-stage setting, they remain the same even if updated. Yes (updated to the same value).

Also, every time the probability setting value is updated by +1 or when the gaming state is switched to a setting variable state, etc., a command (setting value information command) that informs the production control device 300 of the setting value can be sent. good. Similarly, a test signal may be output to an external sight test device every time the probability setting value is updated by +1 or when the gaming state is switched to a variable setting state or the like. In addition, it is preferable to cancel these transmissions and outputs when there is an abnormality such as a main abnormality in the gaming control device 100. In addition, when there is a change in the game state such as a variable probability state, a time saving state, or a jackpot state, or at the start of a special figure fluctuation display game, a command (setting value information command) that informs the production control device 300 of the setting value is sent. Alternatively, the test signal may be output to an external sight-fire test device.

In the above, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the working setting value every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, but the working setting value of the RAM 111c The probability setting value (work setting value) that is being changed is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1039 is "Y").
''), the value corresponding to the working setting value in the working setting value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, if a power outage occurs while changing settings (A1040
If the result is "Y"), it is possible to prevent a situation in which the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, production control, etc. is changed to an unintended value.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (A1310) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be explained. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure game processing. In the special figure game processing, the inputs of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process regarding the special pattern variable display game is controlled, and the display of the special pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first executes the starting port switch monitoring process of monitoring winnings of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 that serves as the starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted, and a special figure variable display is performed based on the winning. A game result preliminary determination is performed to determine the game result based on winnings in advance at a stage before the start of the game. In addition,
Details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes the big winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls in the big winning opening switch 43 (lower big winning opening switch 38a, upper big winning opening switch 39a) is monitored.

Subsequently, a specific area switch monitoring process is executed to monitor the winning (ball entering) of the game ball in the specific area 86 (V winning hole) (A2603). Note that details of the specific area switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
(A2604). By updating the special figure game processing timer by -1, the timer is counted by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing. Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2605). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2605 is "N"), the process moves to step A2620.

If the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2605 is “
Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (A2606). . Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2607).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made based on the special figure game processing number, and a game branching process according to the special figure game processing number is executed (A2608).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A2608, the gaming control device 100
Special figure normal processing that monitors the start of variation of the special figure variation display game, sets the variation start of the special figure variation display game, sets the effect, and sets the information necessary to perform processing during special figure variation. Execute (A2609). In addition, the details of the special figure normal processing will be described later.

If the game processing number is “1” in step A2608, the gaming control device 100
The special figure fluctuation process is executed to set the stop display time of the special figure, set the information necessary to perform the special figure display process, etc. (A2610). For example, in the process during special symbol fluctuation, necessary information such as the symbol stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol and the stop display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern are set, and the processing number "2" related to the process during special symbol display is set. Set and save in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is “2” in step A2608, the gaming control device 100
A special figure displaying process is executed to set the information necessary to move to the jackpot state or the small win state (A2611). For example, in the special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot, necessary information such as the jackpot fanfare command and jackpot fanfare time is set, the processing number "7" is set, and the special figure game processing is performed. Save to number area. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small win, set the necessary information such as the small win fanfare command and small win fanfare time, and enter the process number "3" related to the small win fanfare process.
Set and save in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a failure, a process number "0" related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

If the game processing number is “3” in step A2608, the gaming control device 100
The small win fanfare process is executed (A2612). For example, in the small win fanfare process, set the process number "4" related to the small win opening process, save it in the special game process number area, and set the opening time of the big winning opening due to the small win (small win opening time). The data is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, and the on-data is saved in the upper prize winning opening solenoid output data area.

If the game processing number is “4” in step A2608, the gaming control device 100
A small winning opening process is executed (A2613). For example, in the small hit opening process, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "5" related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set, and the special figure Save in the game processing number area.

If the game processing number is “5” in step A2608, the gaming control device 100
Small hit remaining ball processing is executed (A2614). For example, in the small hit remaining ball process, a process number "6" related to the small win ending process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area, and the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure game process timer area.

If the game processing number is “6” in step A2608, the gaming control device 100
A small hit end process is executed (A2615). For example, in the small hit end process, when the game ball passes through the specific area 86 (so-called V winning hole), necessary information such as the jackpot fanfare command and jackpot fanfare time is set, and the processing related to the fanfare/interval process is performed. Set the number "7" and save it in the special game processing number area, and the game ball will be placed in the specific area 8.
6, the processing number "0" related to the special pattern normal processing is set and saved in the special pattern game processing number area.

If the game processing number is “7” in step A2608, the gaming control device 100
Execute the fanfare/interval processing that sets the opening time of the grand prize opening, updates the number of openings (number of rounds), and sets the information necessary to perform the grand prize opening process (A2
616). For example, in fanfare/interval processing, set the necessary information such as the round command corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the big prize opening,
Set the process number "8" related to the big prize opening process and save it in the special drawing game process number area.

If the game processing number is “8” in step A2608, the gaming control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the process of setting the ending command and the setting of the information necessary to process the remaining balls in the jackpot opening are performed. Medium processing is executed (A2617). For example, in the big winning hole opening process, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command are set, and a process number "9" related to the big winning hole remaining ball process is set and saved in the special drawing game process number area.

If the game processing number is “9” in step A2608, the gaming control device 100
If the jackpot round is the final round, the processing to set the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be ejected, and the processing of remaining balls in the jackpot to set the information necessary to perform the jackpot end processing. Execute (A2618). For example, in the big winning hole remaining ball process, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game process timer area, and the process number "7" related to fanfare/interval process is set in the special figure game process number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, and a process number "10" related to the jackpot end process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

If the game processing number is "10" in step A2608, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process that sets information necessary to execute the special figure normal process (
A2619). For example, in the jackpot end process, set necessary information such as the general power support state (time saving state) after the jackpot state ends, set the process number "0" related to the special pattern normal process, and set the process number "0" in the special pattern game process number area. Save.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2620), and then displays the special figure 1 display 51. 51 is executed (A2621). After preparing a special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2622), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2623). Next, a lever solenoid control process (A2624) is executed to control the opening operation of the lever solenoid 86b so as to open the lever solenoid 86b during a small hit, and the special symbol game process is ended.

[Start switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The gaming control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and
It is determined whether there is a prize in (A2703). If there is no prize in the starting prize opening 36 (
If the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing from step A2709 onwards is executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (A2704).

If the gaming control device 100 determines that the game is not in a right-handed gaming state (the result of A2704 is "N"), it executes the processing from step A2707 onward. On the other hand, if the game state is to hit right (the result of A2704 is "Y"), a right hit instruction notification command is prepared as a performance command (A2705), and a performance command setting process is executed (A2706). In the production command setting process, the production command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the production command is transmitted to the production control device 300.

That is, if it is in the general power support state (time saving state), a right-hand hitting instruction notification command is prepared and the production command setting process is executed, regardless of the probability state (high probability state/low probability state) of the variable display game. . In the case of this embodiment, left-handed players are more likely to win into the starting winning opening 36, and winnings cannot be won into the normal variable winning device 37 unless they are right-handed. Further, unless the ball is hit right-handed, the game ball will not pass through the normal pattern starting gate 34. Therefore, in the general power support state (time saving state), right-handed players are more advantageous than left-handed players, but if there is a prize in the starting prize hole 36 during the general power support state (i.e., during the general power support state) ), a right-handed instruction notification command is sent to the production control device 300 , and the production control device 300 sends a notification (
warning) is executed on the display device 41 or the like by displaying a right-click instruction.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on reservation by the starting prize opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes the special figure starting opening switch common process (A2
708). Then, prepare a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning hole (normal variable winning device 37) (A2709), execute hard random number acquisition processing (A2710), and check whether there is a winning in the second starting winning hole. Determine (A2711). If there is no prize in the second starting prize opening (
If the result of A2711 is "N"), the start port switch monitoring process ends.

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second starting prize opening (the result of A2711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the normal electric accessory (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and is in an open state in which it is possible to win a game ball (A2712). If the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y")
), the process moves to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether a normal electric power fraud is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent winnings (for example, 5 winnings), it is determined that the regular electricity fraud is occurring. In the normal variable winning device 37, game balls cannot be won in the closed state, and game balls can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, this means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there are game balls that win in the closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of fraudulent winnings (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud is occurring.

If the normal electricity fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information on hold by the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) (A2714). , executes the special figure starting port switch common process (A2715), and ends the starting port switch monitoring process. Further, if it is determined in A2713 that a false power supply is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second
Prevent starting memory from occurring any further.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, hardware random number acquisition processing (A2702, A2710
) will be explained in detail. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of hard random number acquisition processing.

The game control device 100 first sets starting slot no winning information indicating that there is no starting slot winning (A2801). Next, determine whether there is an input to the target switch (A2802)
, if there is no input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is "N"), the hard random number acquisition process ends. The target switch is the starting port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the starting port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number obtaining process of step A2710.

The game control device 100 controls the game control device 100 when there is an input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “Y”).
''), reads the random number latch register status (state of the random number latch register), and determines whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (A2803, A2804).
If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (result of A2804 is "N"), the hard random number acquisition process ends.

When the gaming control device 100 has latch data in the target random number latch register (A280
4 result is "Y"), load the extracted jackpot random number into the target hard random number latch register and prepare (A2805), load the extracted special pattern random number into the target hard random number latch register and prepare. (A2806), and sets starting slot winning information indicating that there is a starting slot winning (A2807). In addition, the prepared jackpot random number is used in the special figure starting opening switch common process.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, special figure starting port switch common processing (A2708, A
2715) will be explained in detail. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common process. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

The gaming control device 100 first outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target starting port switch of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the gaming machine 10. The number of times the starting port signal is output is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (A2903 result is "N"),
Save the updated value in the starting port signal output frequency area of RWM (A2904), and proceed to step A.
The process moves to step 2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process moves to step A2905. In this embodiment, values from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by updating by +1, and it is determined that the number of outputs has overflowed.

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets the number of special symbols pending (the number of starting memories) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a to an upper limit value (here, 4) It is determined whether or not it is less than (A2905). When the number of reserved special figures to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure starting opening switch common process is ended. In addition, if the number of reserved special figures to be updated is less than the upper limit (here 4) (result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of reserved special figures to be updated (number of special figures 1 or 2 reserved) number) is updated by +1 (A2906), and the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the gaming control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the monitored start switch and the number of reserved special symbols (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 as the RWM jackpot random number. Save to area (A2909). Next, step A2
Save the special pattern random number prepared in step 806 in the special pattern random number storage area of RWM (A2
910).

In addition, the special symbol random number is the stop symbol number at the time of a small hit, the stop symbol number at the time of a support hit, or the stop symbol number at the time of a jackpot in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process and the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process described later. And, it is used to determine the small hit stop symbol pattern, support hit stop symbol pattern, or jackpot stop symbol pattern corresponding to these stop symbol numbers.

In this embodiment, in order to reduce the random number storage area of RWM, a special symbol random number as one random number (common random number) is shared, and ), the support winning symbols (stopping symbol number at the time of a supporting hit, the supporting hitting stopping symbol pattern), and the jackpot symbols (the stopping symbol number at the time of a jackpot, the jackpot stopping symbol pattern) are sorted. That is, when determining small winning symbols, the range of special pattern random numbers is divided and assigned to each small winning symbol, and when determining support winning symbols, the range of special pattern random numbers is divided and assigned to each support symbol. When assigning to winning symbols or determining jackpot symbols, the range of special symbol random numbers is divided and assigned to each jackpot symbol. Here, each category should not overlap. In addition, instead of the shared special symbol random number, there is a small winning symbol random number for determining the small winning symbol, a supporting symbol random number for determining the time saving symbol (supporting symbol, stop symbol for the supporting symbol), and a jackpot symbol. The jackpot symbol random numbers for determining the symbols may be provided independently.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2911), and saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2911), and saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM. Execute pending information determination processing (pre-determination processing, pre-reading processing) (A29
12). In the special figure pending information determination process, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (jackpot stop symbol, small hit stop symbol, time-saving stop symbol, missed stop symbol) based on the saved jackpot random number, special symbol random number, etc. A look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number (pre-reach variation number) and second half variation number (post-reach variation number) based on the saved variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is set as a production command. Then, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting gate switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations as a production command (A
2913), executes the production command setting process (A2914), and ends the special figure start opening switch common process. In this way, the game control device 100 constitutes a preliminary determination means that can determine the result of the variable display game in advance, before the variable display game based on the starting memory is executed.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the starting winning hole 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, which becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It constitutes a start-up memory means for storing up to a predetermined number of start-up memories. Also,
The starting storage means (gaming control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning hole (starting winning hole 36), with a predetermined number as the upper limit, as a first starting memory. , various random numbers extracted based on winnings of game balls to the second starting winning hole (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as a second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information determination process]
Next, details of the special figure reservation information determination process (A2912) in the starting gate switch common process will be explained. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure reservation information determination processing.
The special figure pending information determination process is a pre-reading (pre-judgment) process that determines result-related information corresponding to the corresponding starting memory before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding starting memory.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the preliminary determination of the current special figure pending information determination process is a determination regarding special figure 2 pending (A3001). In step A2707, if a table for setting information on reservation by the starting winning hole 36 (starting hole 1) is prepared, it is a determination regarding special drawing 1 holding. In step A2714, if a table for setting information on reservation by the second starting winning opening (starting opening 2, normal variable winning device 37) is prepared, it is a determination regarding special drawing 2 holding.

The game control device 100 determines that when the determination is regarding special drawing 1 reservation (the result of A3001 is “
N''), it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot (A3002). If you are not hitting the jackpot (A3
If the result of 002 is "N"), it is determined whether general electricity support is in progress (A3003).

The game control device 100 ends the special figure pending information determination process when the jackpot is in progress (the result of A3002 is "Y") or when the general electricity support is in progress (the result of A3003 is "Y").
As a result, you can read ahead (advance judgment) regarding special map 1 reservation during jackpot or general power support.
is not executed.

The game control device 100 determines if the determination is related to special drawing 2 reservation (if the result of A3001 is “Y”).
”) or if it is not under general power support (result of A3003 is “N”), step A3004
The subsequent processing is started, and first, a jackpot determination process is executed to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3004). As a result, in a state such as a normal game state or a small winning state, which is neither a jackpot nor a general power support, the pre-reading (preliminary judgment) regarding the special drawing 1 reservation can be executed. In addition, the pre-reading (prior judgment) regarding the special figure 2 reservation can be executed regardless of the gaming state.

When the determination result is a jackpot (the result of A3005 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100
, set the jackpot symbol check table corresponding to the target starting switch (A3006)
, acquires stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared special symbol random number from the jackpot symbol check table (A3007), and moves to the process of step A3015.

If the determination result is not a jackpot (the result of A3005 is “N”), the gaming control device 100
, executes a small hit determination process for determining whether or not it is a small hit based on whether or not the jackpot random value matches the small hit determination value (A3008). If the judgment result is a small hit (A3009
If the result is "Y"), set the small hit symbol check table (A3010), obtain the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number prepared from the small winning symbol check table (A3
007), the process moves to step A3015.

If the determination result is not a small hit (the result of A3009 is “N”), the gaming control device 100
A support hit determination process is executed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the support hit determination value to determine whether it is a support hit (time saving symbol win, time saving win) (A3011). Then, if the determination result is a support hit (the result of A3012 is "Y"), a support hit symbol check table is set (A3013), and a stop corresponding to the special symbol random number prepared from the support hit symbol check table is set. The symbol information is acquired (A3007) and the process moves to step A3015.

If the determination result is not a support hit (the result of A3012 is “N”), the gaming control device 100
, sets the stop symbol information of a miss (A3014), and moves to the process of step A3015.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information as a production command (A3015), and executes production command setting processing (A3016). Next, a special figure information setting process is performed to set special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3017), and a variation pattern setting process is executed to set a variation mode of the special figure variation display game (A3018). ).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares as a performance command a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game (A3019 ), performs the production command setting process (A3020), and ends the special figure pending information determination process. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A3017 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A3018 are the same as the process executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure normal process. In the production command setting process, the production command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the production command is transmitted to the production control device 300.

Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command containing the result of the special pattern variation display game based on the starting memory of the prefetch target and a prefetching variation pattern command containing information on the variation pattern in the special pattern variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. and transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (pre-reading result) of the result-related information (whether it is a jackpot or not and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. It is possible to inform the device 300, and in particular, by changing the decorative special symbol start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result-related information can be provided to the player before the start timing of the special symbol variation display game. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting memory means (game controlling device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not it will result in a special result). etc.) serves as a preliminary determination means. Furthermore, the timing to determine in advance the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory is not only at the time of winning the starting prize when the starting memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

In addition, in the above, the jackpot determination process, the small hit determination process, and the support hit determination process are processes that are common to the jackpot determination process, small hit determination process, and support hit determination process in other processes that are executed during the timer interrupt process. be. When the jackpot random number matches the jackpot determination value, the small hit determination value, or the support hit determination value, it is determined that there is a jackpot, a small hit, or a support hit, respectively. For example, the hit determination value is a plurality of consecutive values that are greater than or equal to the lower limit determination value and less than or equal to the upper limit determination value, and the winning probability may be (upper limit determination value−lower limit determination value+1)/(range of jackpot random numbers).

Naturally, in order to avoid two or more results of the same special figure fluctuation display game at the same time: jackpot, small hit, support hit, the range of the jackpot judgment value, the range of the small hit judgment value, the range of the support hit judgment value do not overlap each other. In addition, in this embodiment, a small hit random number or a support hit random number is not provided independently, but a jackpot random number is also used for small hit determination or support hit determination, but a unique small hit random number or support hit random number is provided. Configuration is also possible.

The jackpot probability, small win probability, and support hit probability may differ between a low probability state (normal probability state other than a variable probability state) and a high probability state (variable probability state), or may differ depending on the probability setting value. Note that even if the probability setting values are different, a configuration is also possible in which the jackpot probability, small win probability, or support win probability is made the same.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the big prize opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big winning opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, whether or not the big winning hole opening process is in progress (A3101). If the big prize opening opening process is in progress (the result of A3101 is "Y"), the process moves to step A3105. In addition, if the big prize opening is not being processed (the result of A3101 is "N"), check whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "9", that is, whether the big winning hole remaining balls are being processed. Determine (A3102
).

If the game control device 100 is processing the remaining balls in the big winning hole (the result of A3102 is “Y”),
), the process moves to step A3105. In addition, if the big winning hole remaining balls are not being processed (A
It is determined whether the result of 3102 is "N") and the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether or not the small winning opening process is in progress (A3103). If the small win is being processed while opening (
If the result of A3103 is "Y"), the process moves to step A3105. In addition, if the small hit is not being released (the result of A3103 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress. (A3104). Since the special figure game processing number does not move to the next one until the special figure game processing timer reaches 0, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number in this way.

If the game control device 100 is not processing the small hit remaining balls (the result of A3104 is “N”)
, ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process. Also, if the small hit remaining balls are being processed (A31
If the result of 04 is "Y"), the process moves to step A3105. Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the large winning opening switch 43 (lower large winning opening switch 38a, upper large winning opening switch 39a) (A3105).

When there is an input to the big winning opening switch 43 (result of A3105 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 prepares the big winning opening count command as a production command (A3106), and executes production command setting processing (A3107). Execute. Then, it is determined whether or not the big winning hole remaining balls are being processed (A3108). If the remaining balls in the big winning hole are being processed (the result of A3108 is "Y"), the big winning hole switch monitoring process is finished, and if the remaining balls in the big winning hole are not being processed (A3
108 is "N"), it is determined whether or not small hit remaining balls are being processed (A3109).

If the game control device 100 is processing the small hit remaining balls (the result of A3109 is “Y”)
ends the big winning hole switch monitoring process, and if the remaining small winning balls are not being processed (the result of A3109 is "N"), the big winning hole count is updated by +1 (A3110), and the big winning hole count is the upper limit. It is determined whether the value (the number of game balls that can win in one round, for example 10) or more has been reached (A3111).

The gaming control device 100 determines that when the number of big winning openings is not greater than the upper limit (A31
11 result is "N"), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when the big winning hole count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of A3111 is "Y"), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (A3112). As a result, the grand prize opening will be closed and the first round will end. Subsequently, it is determined whether the small winning opening process is in progress (A3113).

If the gaming control device 100 is not in the process of opening a small hit (the result of A3113 is "N")
, If the big winning opening switch monitoring process is finished and the small winning opening process is in progress (the result of A3113 is "Y"), save the value of the small winning opening operation end in the big winning opening control pointer area (A3
114), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, in this embodiment, since the big winning opening may be opened multiple times during the opening of the small winning for one small winning, the value of the end of the small winning opening operation is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area here. do. If the configuration is such that the jackpot opening is opened multiple times during jackpot opening for one jackpot, similarly, when the jackpot opening process is in progress, the jackpot opening operation end value is set in the jackpot opening control pointer area. You can save.

[Specific area switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the specific area switch monitoring process (A2603) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of specific area switch monitoring processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is a small hit (A3201). For example, if the special figure game processing number is "3", "4", or "5", it can be determined that a small hit is occurring.
If a small hit is occurring (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether the specific area has been passed (A3202). If normal passage information or abnormal passage information is saved in the specific area passage information area, it can be determined that the specific area has been passed.

If the gaming control device 100 has not passed through the specific area (the result of A3202 is “N”)
, it is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (A3203). When there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (result of A3203 is "Y"), that is, when there is a winning (V winning) in the specific area 86, a specific area passing command is prepared as a production command (A32
04), performs production command setting processing (A3205). Furthermore, here, a specific area passing flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area may be set in the specific area passing area.

On the other hand, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the small hit is not in progress (the result of A3201 is "N"), if the specific area has been passed (the result of A3202 is "Y"), or if the specific area switch 72
If there is no input (the result of A3203 is "N"), the specific area switch monitoring process ends without doing anything.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not it is an irregular V winning (A32
06). In this embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (special figure 1 small win), or the result of the special figure 2 variable display game related to reservations other than the remaining reserve in the normal gaming state is a small hit. (Special drawing 2 small win), it will be an irregular V prize. That is, in this embodiment, when a special figure 2 small hit occurs in a specific gaming state (time saving state) or when a special figure 2 small win occurs in a special figure 2 variable display game related to remaining reservation, the normal Won a V prize.

If it is not an irregular V winning, that is, if it is a normal V winning (the result of A3206 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the normal passing information in the specific area passing information area (A
3207), if it is an irregular V winning (the result of A3206 is "Y"), abnormal passage information is saved in the specific area passage information area (A3208). Then, a round number upper limit value table is set (A3209).

Next, the gaming control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value (for example, 3, 10) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information, and saves it in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (A3210).
. The round number upper limit value is the upper limit value of the number of rounds, and corresponds to the number of rounds of the final round. Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A3211).

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of the jackpot in the external information output data area of the RWM (A3212). For example, the signal regarding the start of a jackpot is jackpot 1
Signal on data (turns on when jackpot, small hit of special chart 2), jackpot 2 signal on data (turns on when jackpot, small hit of special chart 2, time saving state, special chart 2 remaining pending expiration period), jackpot 3 signal It is on data (on for jackpot, small hit of special figure 2). Note that the signals related to the start of the jackpot (on/off of jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, etc.) may be defined depending on the model.
Then, test signals related to the start of the jackpot (for example, condition device operating signal turned on, accessory continuous operation device operation signal turned on, condition device operation area 1 valid signal turned off, accessory continuous operation device operation area 1 valid signal off) in the RWM test signal output data area (A3213)
.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the time saving state in the test signal output data area (A3214), saves the no support flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (A3215), and determines the variable symbol. The flag area is cleared (A3216), and the special pattern low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special pattern game mode flag area (A3217). Then, the probability information command (low probability of special drawing & no time saving) is saved in the power outage recovery transmission command area where the command output to the production control device 300 is saved when the power outage is recovered (A3218).

Next, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction variation number 1 area corresponding to the remaining number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the time saving state (A3219), and clears the remaining number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game in the time saving state (A3219). Clear the time reduction variation number 2 area corresponding to the number of executions (A
3220). Then, the ceiling counter area indicating the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in a state other than the variable probability state is cleared (A3221), and the ceiling time reduction activation flag area in which the ceiling time reduction activation flag is stored is cleared (A3222). , clears the ceiling reached flag area where the ceiling reached flag is stored (A3223).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves the number of production mode 1 in the production mode number area (A3224), clears the production remaining rotation number area (A3225), and saves the no-update code in the next mode transition information area ( A3226), information other than the normal base state is saved in the normal base state determination area (A3227), and the specific area switch monitoring process ends. In this way, before the jackpot state starts, the production mode 1 during the jackpot state is set.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be explained.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the remaining ball counter of the big winning hole is 0 (A3301). If the remaining ball counter of the big prize opening is not 0 (the result of A3301 is “N
”), the process moves to step A3314 without starting the special figure fluctuation display game.

The game control device 100 determines whether the number of reserved special drawings 2 (second starting memory number) is 0 when the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is 0 (the result of A3301 is "Y"). (A330
2). If the number of reserved special drawings 2 is 0 (result of A3302 is "Y"), the number of reserved special drawings 1 (first
It is determined whether the starting memory number) is 0 (A3306). Then, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is 0 (result of A3306 is "Y"), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (
A3310) If the customer waiting demonstration has not started yet (the result of A3310 is "N"), a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3311).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a performance command (
A3312), performance command setting processing is performed (A3313), and the process moves to step A3314. On the other hand, in step A3310, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (A33
10 result is "Y"), and set "0" related to special figure normal processing as the processing number (A3314
), saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A3315), and clears the variable symbol discrimination flag area (A3316). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3317), and the special symbol normal processing is ended.

In addition, if the number of special drawings 2 pending is not 0 (the result of A3302 is “N
”), prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the number of special figures 2 reservation as a production command (A3303), and executes production command setting processing (A33
04). In addition, the decoration special figure reservation number command here is only 1 from the current number of special figure 2 reservations, considering that the number of special figure 2 reservations will be reduced by 1 due to the start of the special figure 2 variable display game later. It may include information corresponding to the subtracted value. Alternatively, if the special figure 2 pending number managed by the production control device 300 is to be decreased by 1 due to the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the decoration special figure 2 pending number command here can be used to change the number of special figure 2 pending at the present moment. may include information corresponding to the number. after that,
The special figure 2 variation start process is executed (A3305), and the special figure normal process is ended.

In addition, if the number of special drawings 1 pending is not 0 (the result of A3306 is “N
''), prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the number of special figures 1 reservation as a production command (A3307), and executes production command setting processing (A33
08). In addition, the decoration special figure reservation number command here takes into consideration that the number of special figure 1 reservations will be reduced by 1 due to the start of the special figure 1 variable display game later, and the number of special figures 1 reservations at the present time will be reduced by 1. It may include information corresponding to the subtracted value. Alternatively, if the special figure 1 pending number managed by the production control device 300 is to be decreased by 1 due to the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the decoration special figure 1 pending number command here can be used to change the number of special figure 1 pending at the present moment. may include information corresponding to the number. after that,
The special figure 1 variation start process is executed (A3309), and the special figure normal process is ended.

In this way, by checking the number of reserved special figures 2 before checking the number of reserved special figures 1, if the number of reserved special figures 2 is not 0, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3305) is executed. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game will be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 2 pending priority consumption). In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory into the variable display game based on the first start memory. It serves as a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3309) in the special figure normal process will be explained. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol 1 variation start processing. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, jackpot flag 1 setting processing is executed to set loss information and jackpot information to jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot (A3402). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A3403). In the special pattern 1 stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol number at the time of miss, support hit, small hit, or jackpot, and the miss stop symbol pattern, support hit stop symbol pattern, and small hit stop corresponding to this stop symbol number. Save the symbol pattern or jackpot stop symbol pattern. The stop symbol numbers at the time of a support hit, a small hit, or a jackpot are each determined corresponding to the special pattern random numbers.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process that sets special figure information that is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3404).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405 ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process that sets a variation pattern (variation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game by distribution (A3406). In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is a first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game until it becomes a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern from the time it becomes a reach state until the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a certain late fluctuation pattern. Through the variation pattern setting process, the first half variation number corresponding to the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number corresponding to the second half variation pattern are acquired and saved in the first half variation number area and the second half variation number area, respectively. Note that a configuration in which the first-half variation pattern and the second-half variation pattern are not distinguished is also possible.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a variation start information setting process that sets information on the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (A3407). In the variation start information setting process, a variation time value corresponding to a variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, the fluctuation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number
is prepared as a production command, and production command setting processing is performed. In addition, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the number of reserved special symbols related to the special symbol type (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the special symbol variable display game to be started from now is updated by -1 (decreased by 1).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets "1" related to the special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (
A3408), save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A3409).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3410) and saves the signal regarding the start of variation of special symbol 1 (turns on the signal during special symbol 1 variation) in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and save the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (for example, 100ms) (A3413). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability) and the presence or absence of a time saving state (with/without time saving) do not directly affect the distribution of the fluctuation patterns, and the production mode managed by the game control device 100 Affects distribution of fluctuations. As for the performance mode, one performance mode is set from a plurality of performance modes depending on the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special symbol variation display game, etc. Incidentally, the fluctuations may be directly distributed based on the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special symbol fluctuation display game, etc.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3305) in the special figure normal process will be explained. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 23 is performed on the second start memory. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first selects the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
The special figure 2 variation flag indicating 2 is saved in the variation symbol discrimination area (A3501). Next, jackpot flag 2 setting processing is executed to set loss information and jackpot information to jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot (A3502
).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) regarding the special figure 2 variable display game (A3503). Furthermore, special figure information setting processing is executed to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3504). Next, a special figure 2 variable pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variable pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process that sets a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game by distribution (A3506). Then, a variation start information setting process is executed to set information on the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3507).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets "1" related to the special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (
A3508), save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A3509).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3510) and saves the signal regarding the start of variation of special symbol 2 (turns on the signal during special symbol 2 variation) in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and save the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (for example, 100ms) (A3513). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (A3514), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

[Jackpot flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot flag 1 setting processing.

The game control device 100 first saves the loss information in the jackpot flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area, and the support hit flag 1 area (A3601). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special chart 1 jackpot random number storage area (for pending number 1), prepare it (A3602), and clear the special chart 1 jackpot random number storage area (for pending number 1) to 0. (A3603). In addition, for reservation number 1, information about the special figure starting memory whose consumption order is the first (in this case, the first among special figures 1)
This is an area for storing random numbers, etc.). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process is executed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot depending on whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3604
).

If the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process (A3604) is a jackpot (the result of A3605 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A3601. Save (A3606) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process (A3604) is not a jackpot (the result of A3605 is "N"), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the small hit judgment value. A small hit determination process is executed to determine whether the game is a small hit or not (A3608). In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine the small hit. If the judgment result of the small hit determination process (A3607) is a small hit (the result of A3708 is "Y"), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A3601. (A3709),
The jackpot flag 2 setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the small hit judgment process (A3607) is not a small hit (the result of A3608 is "N"), it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation display game is a support hit based on the obtained jackpot random number. A support hit determination process is executed (A3610), and it is determined whether the determination result is a support hit (A3611). In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine the support hit. Here, the support hit (time-saving hit) of the special figure fluctuation display game is a time-saving result (specific result) that enters the time-saving state from the next special figure fluctuation display game. Corresponding to this time-saving result, a time-saving symbol can be displayed on the special symbol display device (first special symbol variation display section 51 or second special symbol variation display section 52) and display device 41 as a result of stopping the special symbol variation display game. .

If the special figure fluctuation display game is a support hit (the result of A3611 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A3601 and saves it. (A3612), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends.
On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation display game is not a support hit (the result of A3611 is "N"), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is ended without saving the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area.

As described above, in this embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is one of "big hit", "small hit", "support hit (time-saving hit)", and "loss".

When the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game is a support hit result (time saving result), in the special pattern 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) or the special pattern 2 stop pattern setting process (A3503), the stop pattern (stop pattern number, stop A time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol number, time-saving symbol pattern) is set as a symbol pattern), and the time-saving state starts from the next special symbol variation display game. That is, in this case, the time is suddenly reduced without going through the jackpot (sudden time reduction). In addition, in this case, the time-saving symbol is displayed on the special symbol display, and the decoration special symbol command corresponding to the time-saving symbol is sent to the production control device 3.
00, and on the display device 41, the time-saving symbol (decorative time-saving symbol) is displayed as a decorative stop symbol by the production control device 300.

The time-saving symbol displayed on the display device 41 is, for example, a symbol with only the left symbol and the middle symbol.
1, 1, 3" etc. There are no restrictions on time-saving symbols as long as they are decided in advance, but there are regular patterns such as "1, 2, 3" where the numbers are lined up in order or "1, 3, 1" where only the left and right symbols are aligned. However, it is preferable that it is easy for players to remember. A plurality of time-saving symbols may be prepared, and the number of times the special symbol variation display game in which the time-saving state continues (time-saving frequency) may be determined for each time-saving symbol.

The lamp display parts 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 emit light in a specific manner as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) in the case of a time-saving result (time-saving symbol), unlike in the case of a jackpot result or a small hit result. do. For example, the lamp display parts 1 and 2 may emit light in a warm color such as red in the case of a jackpot result or a small win result, and a neutral color such as green or blue in the case of a time-saving result (time-saving symbol). It may emit light in a color or a cool color (that is, a color other than a warm color). Moreover, in the case of a miss, the light is turned off. Therefore, when the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stop symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that a jackpot has occurred, and it becomes easier for the player to understand that he has won in time-saving.

In addition, if the number of times of the special figure fluctuation display game that is executed after the end of the jackpot state (excluding the number of times in the variable probability state) reaches a predetermined number (so-called ceiling number of times, time-saving ceiling), even if you do not win the support hit. Enter a time-saving state (play time). At this time, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a loss, the lamp display sections 1 and 2 are turned off, and if the result is a small hit or a jackpot, they emit light in a warm color. At this time, if it is not a small hit or a jackpot, the lamp display parts 1 and 2 may emit light in a cool color as the fourth symbol in order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game will enter a time-saving state. . The predetermined number of times (ceiling number of times) is, for example, 500 times or 800 times. In this case,
On the special figure display device or display device 41, a losing symbol (a time-saving symbol may be used) or a small winning symbol (if it is a small winning without a V winning) is displayed as a stop symbol, and the time-saving state starts from the next special symbol fluctuation display game. enter abruptly.

[Jackpot flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the loss information in the jackpot flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, RWM special drawing 2 jackpot random number storage area (for number of reservations 1)
Load the jackpot random number from , prepare it (A3702), and store the corresponding special drawing 2 jackpot random number storage area (
1) is cleared to 0 (A3703). Note that for 1 pending number, the order of consumption is first (
Here, it is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) regarding the special figure starting memory (first among the special figures 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process is executed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3704). Game control device 100
If the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3701 (A3706). ), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends. on the other hand,
If the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process (A3704) is not a jackpot (the result of A3705 is “N
”), executes a small hit determination process to determine whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the prepared jackpot random value matches the small hit determination value (A3707).

If the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3707) is a small hit (the result of A3708 is "Y"), the game control device 100 stores the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3701. is overwritten and saved (A3709), and the jackpot flag 2 setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3708 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

As described above, in this embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is one of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss", but as an option, similar to the jackpot flag 1 setting process In addition, it is also possible to provide a "support hit (time saving win)" as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4001). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4002). If jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (result of A4002 is "Y"), next, set the special symbol 1 jackpot symbol table (A4003) and obtain the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number. Save in the RWM special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). Through this process, the jackpot symbol of special drawing 1 is selected as the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table (A40
05), acquire the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number and save it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). Based on the stop symbol pattern, the stop symbols on the display device 41 can be set. Then, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4007). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the time reduction judgment data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time reduction state after the end of the jackpot (with or without time reduction) and the number of time reductions. Subsequently, the production mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern (or stopped symbol number) and probability state is saved (A4009). Thereafter, the process moves to step A4023.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4002 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag 1 is a small jackpot (A4010). When the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (the result of A4010 is "Y"), a special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4011). Then, refer to the special pattern 1 small winning pattern table, obtain the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special pattern random number, and save it in the special pattern 1 stop symbol number area (
A4012). Through this process, the small winning symbol of special drawing 1 is selected as the type of special result.
Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4013). After that, production mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is saved (A4014). Thereafter, the process moves to step A4023.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (A4015). When the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (the result of A4015 is "Y"), a special figure 1 support symbol table is set (A4016). Then, with reference to the special pattern 1 support symbol table, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special pattern random number is obtained and saved in the special pattern 1 stop symbol number area (A4017). Through this process, the support winning symbol of special figure 1 is selected as the type of special result. Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4018). Thereafter, time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4019), and production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (A4020). Then step A402
Proceed to step 3.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4002 is “N”), if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is “N”), and
If the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (the result of A4015 is "N"), the stop symbol number at the time of miss is saved in the special pattern 1 stop symbol number area (A4021), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (A4022). Thereafter, the process moves to step A4023.

After steps A4009, A4014, A4020, and A4022, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special pattern command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4023), and saves the decorative special pattern command as a production command in the decorative special pattern command area. (A4024). Through the above processing, the stop symbols corresponding to the results of the special figure 1 variable display game are set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes production command setting processing (A4025). Thereby, the special decoration command is transmitted to the production control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4026), and clears the special symbol 1 special symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 ( A4027). After that, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended. In addition, by the above-mentioned symbol fluctuation control process, the stop symbol (or stop symbol pattern) corresponding to the stop symbol number (or stop symbol pattern) is
The stop display of jackpot symbols, small prize symbols, time-saving symbols, losing symbols, etc. is on the special symbol 1 display 51.
is executed.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4101). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A4102). If jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (result of A4102 is "Y"), next set the special symbol 2 jackpot symbol table (A4103) and obtain the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number. Save in the special pattern 2 stop symbol number area of RWM (A4104). Through this process, the jackpot symbol of special drawing 2 is selected as the type of special result. In addition, if the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol table is different from the special pattern 1 jackpot symbol table, the distribution of the jackpot symbols of the special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 will be different.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table (A41
05), acquire the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number and save it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbols on the display device 41 can be set based on the stop symbol pattern. Then, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4107). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the time reduction judgment data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time reduction state after the end of the jackpot (with or without time reduction) and the number of time reductions. Subsequently, production mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern (or stopped symbol number) and probability state is saved (A4109). Thereafter, the process moves to step A4117.

If the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (if the result of A4102 is “N
”), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (A4110). Small hit flag 2
When is a small hit (the result of A4110 is "Y"), a special figure 2 small win symbol table is set (A4111). Then, refer to the special pattern 2 small winning pattern table, obtain the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded special pattern random number, and save it in the special pattern 2 stop pattern number area (A41
12). Through this process, the small winning symbol of special drawing 2 is selected as the type of special result. In addition,
If the special pattern 2 small winning pattern table is different from the special pattern 1 small winning pattern table, the distribution of the small winning patterns of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 will be different. Next, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4113), the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (A4114), and the process moves to step A4117. do.

The gaming control device 100 determines that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A4102 is "N").
, and if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4110 is "N"), the stop symbol number at the time of miss is saved in the special pattern 2 stop symbol number area (A4115), and the miss stop symbol pattern is stopped. Save in the symbol pattern area (A4116). After that, step A411
Proceed to step 7.

After steps A4109, A4114, and A4116, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special pattern command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4117), and saves the decorative special pattern command as a production command in the decorative special pattern command area (A4118). ). Through the above processing,
A stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes production command setting processing (A4119). The special decoration command is transmitted to the production control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4120), and clears the special symbol 2 special symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 ( A4121). After that, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is ended. In addition, by the above-mentioned symbol fluctuation control process, the stop symbol (or stop symbol pattern) corresponding to the stop symbol number (or stop symbol pattern) is
The stop display of jackpot symbols, small prize symbols, time-saving symbols, losing symbols, etc.) is on the special symbol 2 display 52.
is executed.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first starting winning hole 36, and the detection of the game ball at the normal variable winning device 37. The variable display game execution means executes the special figure 2 variable display game as a variable display game based on the above. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting process (A
3407, A3507) will be explained in detail. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The gaming control device 100 first clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, a first half variation time value table is set (A4602), and a first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is obtained (A4603). Furthermore, a second half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and a second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (A4
605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A460
6) Save the added value (total fluctuation time value) in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607)
. After that, prepare a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A4608),
Prepare the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number as a production command (
A4609), performance command setting processing is performed (A4610). Next, update the number of reserved special symbols by -1 that corresponds to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag that indicates the fluctuation symbol to start (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2).
A4611), set the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag (A4
612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure variable display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination device that determines various random numbers stored in the startup storage device (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means that can determine a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in a variable display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special symbol variation display games. to set detailed performance contents in the decorative special figure variable display game. Information related to the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure reservation number command that includes information on the starting memory number (number of reservations), a decorative special figure command that includes information on stop symbols, and a change in the special figure fluctuation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information regarding patterns, and the commands are transmitted to the production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the production control device 300 can proceed efficiently.

[Special figure fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the special figure fluctuation processing (A2610) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure fluctuation processing.

The game control device 100 first issues a symbol stop command (special symbol 1 symbol stop command or special symbol 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag (special symbol 1 variation flag or special symbol 2 variation flag) as a production command. Prepare (A4701) and execute production command setting processing (
A4702). The variable symbol discrimination flag indicates the variable symbol to start (special figure 1 or special figure 2), and indicates whether the started special figure variable display game is the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. Discern. The production control device 300 that has received the symbol stop command stops the corresponding decorative special pattern variable display game (decorative special pattern 1 variable display game or decorative special pattern 2 variable display game).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a stop display time (display time) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set stop display time in the special pattern game processing timer area. (A4704). In the case of this embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a missed symbol pattern, a jackpot symbol pattern, a small win symbol pattern, or a support symbol pattern, 600 msec is commonly set as the stop display time. Since the stop display time is common, control is simplified and the program capacity of the game control program can be reduced.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the production mode to support mode B (in time saving mode #1B).
It is determined whether or not (A4705). When not in support mode B (result of A4705 is "N"), that is, in a production mode other than support mode B (including modes other than time saving mode), execute time saving end determination processing to determine the end of time saving ( A4706), step A47
The process moves to step 07. If the production mode is in support mode B (the result of A4705 is "Y"), step A47 is performed without executing the time saving end determination process that determines the end of the time saving.
The process moves to step 07.

Therefore, in support mode B, when the special symbol fluctuation processing is executed, that is, at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation display game (just before or at the start of display of the stop symbol), the time reduction ends (i.e., the normal end of support) is never set. However, in production modes other than support mode B, there is a possibility that the end of time reduction (end of general electricity support) is set when executing the process during special symbol fluctuation. In addition, as described later, as performance modes other than support mode B, there are support mode A (time saving mode #1A) with general power support, working time saving mode #3, time saving mode #4, and a mode without support without general power support. There is a normal mode, a remaining hold consumption mode, etc.

Note that support mode A (time saving mode #1A), support mode B (time saving mode #1B), time saving mode #3, and time saving mode #4 are time saving states in which the number of time saving times is different from each other as described later.

In addition, in step A4705, it is determined whether or not it is in support mode B and there is a special figure 2 small hit, and only if it is a production mode other than support mode B or there is not a special figure 2 small hit,
A time saving end determination process may also be executed. In this way, if you are in a performance mode other than support mode B or if you do not win the special figure 2 small hit, the time saving will end when the special figure fluctuation processing is executed, that is, when the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game ends. (End of general electricity support) can be set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number "2" related to the special figure display processing (A4
707), save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A4708).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of variation of special symbol 1 (turns off the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal) in the test signal output data area (A4709), and further saves the signal regarding the end of variation of special symbol 2. (Special symbol 2 fluctuation signal off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A4710).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in the symbol confirmation number signal control timer area used when outputting the symbol confirmation number signal related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game to the external information terminal. Save (A4711).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the stop flag related to the stoppage of the variation on the special figure 1 display 51 in the special figure 1 variation control flag area as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51. (A4712). Furthermore, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the stoppage of fluctuation on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A4713). , ends the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process.

[Time saving end determination process]
Next, details of the time saving end determination process (A4706) in the special figure fluctuation process will be explained. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time saving end determination process. In addition, when it is not in support mode B, the time-saving end judgment process is executed in the special figure fluctuation process, but as described later, when it is in support mode B, the time-saving end judgment process (A5137) is executed in the special figure display process.
is executed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in general power support (in a time saving state) (
A4801). If the utility power is not supported (the result of A4801 is "N"), the performance mode information check process is executed without executing the time saving end setting process (A4809). If the general electricity support is in progress (the result of A4801 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not it is a variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (A4802). If it is a variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A4802 is "Y"), the process moves to step A4806.

If it is a variation of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A4802 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit result (special figure 2 small win). Determine (A4803). If the small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit, it can be determined that the result is a small hit. When the special figure 2 variable display game results in a small hit (the result of A4803 is "Y"), a time saving end setting process is executed to set the end of the time saving (A4808).

Therefore, in the case of a time-saving mode other than support mode B, if the special figure 2 small hit is executed, the time-saving mode is executed when the special figure 2 fluctuation processing is executed, that is, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game ends (stops). (end of general electricity support) will be set (see FIG. 49A). In addition, as described later, in the case of the time saving mode of support mode B, if there is a special figure 2 small hit, when the special figure display processing is executed, that is, when the stop display of the small winning symbol ends (the stop display time At the time of termination, immediately before the small win fanfare or at the start of the small win fanfare), the time-saving end (end of general power support) is set (see FIG. 49A).

If the special figure 2 variable display game does not result in a small hit, the game control device 100
The result is "N"), the time reduction variation number 2 is updated by -1 (decreased by 1) (A4804),
It is determined whether the time reduction variation number 2 is 0 (A4805). Time reduction variation number 2 is 0
If so (result of A4805 is "Y"), a time saving end setting process for setting the end of time saving is executed (A4808). The number of time reduction fluctuations 2 corresponds to the remaining number of times of time reduction, which will be described later.

If the time reduction variation number 2 is not 0 (the result of A4805 is “N
''), the time reduction variation number 1 is updated by -1 (decreased by 1) (A4806), and it is determined whether or not the time reduction variation number 1 is 0 (A4807). If the time reduction variation number 1 is not 0 (
If the result of A4807 is "N"), the process moves to step A4809. On the other hand, if the time reduction variation number 1 is 0 (the result of A4807 is "Y"), a time reduction end setting process is executed to set the end of the time reduction (A4808). Thereafter, a production mode information check process to be described later is executed (A4809). The number of time reduction fluctuations 1 corresponds to the remaining number of times of the total number of time reductions, which will be described later.

In this way, when the special figure 2 variable display game results in a small hit (special figure 2 small win), the time saving (time saving mode, time saving state) ends and the general electricity support also ends. In addition, if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a small hit result (special figure 1 small win), the time saving will not end in the time saving end determination process, except in special cases where the time reduction variation number 1 becomes 0. (The result of A4802 is "Y"), but the time saving ends when V is won during the small hit (A3215, A3 of the specific area switch monitoring process)
217). As mentioned later, since it is difficult to win a V prize with 1 small hit on special drawings, basically the time saving does not end when there is 1 small winning on special drawings (the time saving continues even during the small winning state), but when winning 2 small drawings on special drawings If you win a small hit, the time saving period ends. In addition, in the case of a special figure 1 small hit, a configuration in which the time saving ends in the time saving end determination process is also possible.

In addition, if the special figure 2 variable display game has been executed the first predetermined number of times since the start of time saving (time saving mode, time saving state), that is, the number of execution games of the special figure 2 variable display game has reached the first predetermined number of times. In this case, the time reduction variation number 2 becomes 0, the time reduction ends, and the general electricity support ends.
Here, the first predetermined number of times is the number of time reductions (for example, 7 times,
30 times, 200 times, etc.).

In addition, if the special figure fluctuation display game (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is executed a second predetermined number of times from the start of the time saving, that is, the number of execution games of the special figure fluctuation display game is the second predetermined number of times. 2 When the predetermined number of times is reached, the time reduction variation number 1 becomes 0, the time reduction ends, and the general electricity support ends. Here, the second predetermined number of times is the total number of time reductions as the initial value of the time reduction variation number 1, and is the total number of times of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed until the time reduction ends. Yes, the value is the first predetermined number of times plus 4 (for example, 11 times, 34 times, 204 times)
times, etc.).

In summary, in the time saving end determination process, the time saving end condition for setting the end of time saving is that the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 or the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 becomes 0, or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game results in a small hit. It is (special figure 2 small hit).

In addition, in the small hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game during the time saving (special figure 1 small win), if there is a V prize during the small hit, the end of the time saving is set, but if there is no V prize during the small hit. In this case, the end of the time saving is not set and the variable display game with the time saving is restarted after a small hit. In addition, if the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is a direct jackpot (i.e., a jackpot that is not due to V winning), when the stop display of the jackpot symbol ends (i.e., at the end of the stop display time) In this case, the time-saving end is set immediately before the jackpot fanfare or at the start of the jackpot fanfare (see FIGS. 35 and 49B).

In addition, when the special figure variation display game (the previous special figure variation display game) in which the time reduction ends when the time reduction variation number 1 or time reduction variation number 2 becomes 0, it stops when the number of times shortening has just reached the ceiling or when the time reduction symbol is displayed. In this case, a new time saving may start from the next special figure fluctuation display game. However, in production modes other than support mode B, when the variation of the special figure variation display game ends (stops), it becomes clear that the time saving has ended once. In addition, in production modes other than support mode B, the output of external information (such as the jackpot 2 signal) and test signals (such as the fluctuation time reduction status signal) is
By being in the off state for the stop display time of the stop result (stop symbol), when time saving is resumed, the on state of the output of external information and test signals can be clearly identified.

[Time-saving end setting process]
Next, details of the time saving end setting process (A4808) in the special figure fluctuation process will be explained. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time saving termination setting process.

The gaming control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the time-saving end in the external information output data area of the RWM (A4901). Here, the signal regarding the time-saving end is the off data of the jackpot 2 signal. As a result, a signal regarding time-saving termination is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, there is no power supply support, so basically the normal variable prize winning device 3
There is no winning in 7 and the second starting memory does not occur. Therefore, if the second starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory, special figure 2 pending) remains as the remaining pending at the time of the time saving end, the output of the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal will continue (in this way) ), when the variable display of the special symbol variable display game related to the last remaining reservation is stopped, the off data of the jackpot 2 signal (signal related to the end of time saving) is output to the external device.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the signal regarding the time saving end in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A4902). As a result, a signal regarding the time-saving termination is outputted to the sight-firing test device as a test signal. The signals related to the time reduction end here are, for example, off data of the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal, and off data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal. Then, save the number with no time saving in the game status display number area of RWM (A4903), save the flag with no support for general patterns in the general pattern game mode flag area of RWM (A4904), and save the non-standard pattern support flag in the special pattern game mode flag area of RWM. Save the special map low probability & no time saving flag (A4905). With the above steps, the time saving state (general power support state) ends.

Next, the gaming control device 100 clears the time reduction variation number 1 area of the RWM where the time reduction variation number 1 is stored (A4906), and clears the time reduction variation number 2 area of the RWM where the time reduction variation number 2 is stored. Clear (A4907). Then, the signal regarding the left-handed batting instruction is R.
Save in the test signal output data area of WM (A4908), and save the game status display number 2 of RWM.
The number in the left-handed batting state is saved in the area (A4909).

After that, save the normal base state information in the normal base state determination area of RWM (A49
10). Here, the normal base state information is a value indicating the normal gaming state, which is the period for calculating the base value (ball payout rate in the normal gaming state). Thereafter, the time saving end setting process is ended.

In this way, by executing the time-saving end setting process, the time-saving state (state with low probability of special drawings and normal electricity support) can be appropriately changed from the normal gaming state (state with low probability of special drawings and no normal electricity support)
It can be moved to

[Production mode information check process]
Next, details of the production mode information check process (A4809) in the special figure fluctuation process will be explained. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of production mode information check processing.

The gaming control device 100 first determines whether the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5001). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of A5001 is "Y"), the production mode information check process is ended. In this case, the production mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game has been executed, and for example, a production mode that continues until the next jackpot is selected.

In addition, if the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (A50
If the result of 01 is "N"), the number of remaining rotations of the performance, which is the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed until the change of the production mode, is updated by -1 (A5002), and the remaining number of rotations of the performance becomes 0. (A5003). Here, the number of remaining rotations of the effect is updated by -1 only if the main special figure variable display game is executed this time, but it is also updated by -1 if it is a non-main variable display game. Configuration is also possible.

Depending on the gaming state and the like, one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is determined as the main variable display game. For example, the main fluctuating display game (main fluctuating display game) is the one that is executed more frequently between the special figure 1 fluctuating display game and the special diagram 2 fluctuating display game, and the non-main fluctuating display game (secondary fluctuating display game) Game) is special map 1
This is the one that is not frequently executed between the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 and/or the production control device 300 may store information (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating the main variable display game according to the game state etc.

When the number of rotations remaining for the performance is not 0 (the result of A5003 is "N"), the performance mode information check process is ended. In addition, if the remaining number of rotations of the effect becomes 0 (the result of A5003 is "Y"), that is, if the effect mode is to be transferred from the next special figure fluctuation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (A5004). , obtains the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the production mode number of the production mode to be transferred, and RW
Save in the production mode number area in M (A5006), obtain the remaining production rotation number (initial value) of the production mode to be transferred, and save in the production remaining rotation number area in RWM (A5007).
, acquires the next mode transition information of the production mode to be transitioned to, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A5008).

In addition, when changing the production mode due to the end of the time saving state (time reduction variation number 1 or 2 = 0), the number of remaining production rotations (initial value) of the production mode to be transitioned to is set to the specified remaining number of reservations (for example, 4). You can set it to . The remaining number of reservations is the special map 2 reservation (remaining reservation) that will be consumed after the time-saving state ends.
This is the number of times the special figure 2 changes after the time saving ends. The remaining reserve is generated by winning a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, which is released by winning a common symbol during the time saving state. In this way, the remaining pending extinguishing mode can be set as a corresponding performance mode while the remaining pending (special figure 2 pending, special figure 2 starting memory) is being exhausted.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (including probability state information, time saving information, and performance mode information) corresponding to the newly set performance mode number as a performance command (A5009). , it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command field at power outage recovery (A5010). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command field at power failure recovery (result of A5010 is "Y"), that is, if the probability information command has not changed, the performance mode information check process is ended.

In addition, if the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power outage recovery transmission command area (A5010 result is "N"), save the prepared probability information command in the power outage recovery transmission command area (A5011 ), executes a production command setting process for setting the probability information command as a production command (A5012).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a production rotation number command corresponding to the production remaining rotation number as a production command (A5013), and executes production command setting processing (A5014).
). Thereby, the production control device 300 can acquire the number of rotations remaining for the production. Next, prepare a time reduction variation number command corresponding to time reduction variation number 2 as a production command (A50
15) Execute production command setting processing (A5016). As a result, the production control device 3
00 can obtain the number of time reduction fluctuations 2. Note that the game control device 100 may similarly prepare the time reduction variation number 1 as a production command and execute the production command setting process.

Next, when the new performance mode number is acquired in step A5006, the game control device 100 determines whether the new performance mode is a left-handed hitting mode (A5017).
, if it is not the left-handed hitting mode (the result of A5017 is "N"), the production mode information check process is ended. Also, if you are in left-handed batting mode (the result of A5017 is "Y")
In this step, a left-handed hitting instruction notification command is prepared as a production command (A5018), a production command setting process is executed (A5019), and the production mode information check process is ended.

In addition, in the above, the determination result (A500
3), the effect rotation number command corresponding to the updated effect remaining rotation number (A5002) and the time reduction variation number command corresponding to the updated time reduction variation number 1, 2 (A4804, A4806) are also effect commands. You may prepare as follows and execute the production command setting process.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (A2611) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure display process. FIG. 34A shows the first half of the special figure display process, and FIG. 34B shows the second half of the special figure display process.

The game control device 100 first loads support hit flag 1 and support hit flag 2 (A
5101), clear the support hit flag 1 area and support hit flag 2 area of RWM (A
5102). Next, load small hit flag 1 and small hit flag 2 (A5103), and press R.
The small hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 2 area of the WM are cleared (A5104). Subsequently, jackpot flag 1 and jackpot flag 2 are loaded (A5105), and the jackpot flag 1 area and jackpot flag 2 area of the RWM are cleared (A5106).

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A5107), and if it is a jackpot (the result of A5107 is "Y"), it is a jackpot of the second special figure fluctuation display game. Test signals related to the start of (special pattern 2 jackpot) (for example, turn on the condition device operation signal, turn on the accessory continuous operation device operation signal, turn on the special symbol 2 hit signal) to the test signal output data area of RWM. Save (A5110), load the special figure game mode flag, and save the loaded flag in the special figure game mode flag save area (A5111).

On the other hand, as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, if the gaming control device 100 does not find a jackpot (
The result of A5107 is "N"), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot or not (
A5108), if it is a jackpot (the result of A5108 is "Y"), a test signal (for example, turning on the conditional device operating signal, Continuous operation device operation signal is turned on, special symbol per 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (A5109), the special pattern game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is set as the special pattern game mode flag. Save in the evacuation area (A5111).

After that, the gaming control device 100 sets a round number upper limit value table (A5112),
Based on the round number upper limit table, round number upper limit information (A4007, A4107
) is obtained (for example, 3, 10) and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (A5113). The round number upper limit value information is acquired in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process or the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, and corresponds to the stop symbol number of the jackpot. For this reason,
The upper limit of the number of rounds will differ depending on the jackpot symbol (jackpot stop symbol number).
Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5114).

Next, the game control device 100 sends an RWM decoration special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern.
is loaded from the special decoration command area, prepared as a production command (A5115), and executes production command setting processing (A5116). After that, a probability information command related to information that sets the probability of a winning result in the special figure fluctuation display game to a normal probability state (low probability state) and no time saving (no public power support) is prepared as a production command ( A5117) and effect command setting processing is executed (A5118). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds is prepared as a production command (A5119), and production command setting processing is executed (A5120).

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of the jackpot in the external information output data area of the RWM (A5121). In this embodiment, the jackpot 1 signal turns on at the start of the jackpot or the small hit of the special figure 2, and turns off at the end of the jackpot or the small hit of the special figure 2. jackpot 2
The signal is turned on at the start of the jackpot or the small hit of the special figure 2, and is turned off at the end of the jackpot or the small hit of the special figure 2 unless the time is shortened after the jackpot. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on at the start of time saving and turned off at the end of the remaining reservation extinguishing mode (when the last variable display game related to the remaining reservation is stopped). The jackpot 3 signal turns on at the start of the jackpot or the small hit of the special figure 2, and turns off at the end of the jackpot or the small hit of the special figure 2. Note that the signals related to the start of the jackpot (on/off of jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, etc.) may be defined depending on the model.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and production mode (A5119), and saves the set jackpot fanfare time in the special pattern game processing timer area (A5123).

Then, the gaming control device 100 clears the area of the number of fraudulent winnings from the big winning opening (A5124),
A flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A5125).
After that, fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1 is executed (A5126),
Ends the special figure display process.

When the jackpot flags 1 and 2 are not a jackpot, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot flags 1 and 2 to
108 result is "N"), the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is executed is the ceiling number (time-saving ceiling)
It is determined whether there is a ceiling reached flag indicating that the ceiling has been reached (A5127). If there is no ceiling reached flag (the result of A5127 is "N"), the ceiling counter value in the ceiling counter area of the RWM is updated by +1 (increased by 1) (A5128). Then, it is determined whether the ceiling counter value indicating the number of times the special figure variable display game (including the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game) has been executed in a state other than the probability variable state has reached the ceiling number of times. Determine (A5129
). For example, the ceiling number of times is 500 or 800 times. When the ceiling number is reached (A51
29 is "Y"), the ceiling time reduction activation flag indicating that the ceiling time reduction will occur and the ceiling reached flag indicating that the ceiling number of times has been reached are set (turned on) (A5130). Also,
In this embodiment, there is no variable probability state, but in models that have a variable probability state, special figures with high probability (
Only in the case of not being in a variable probability state), the process of updating the ceiling counter value by +1 in step A5128 is executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit (A5131).

Note that the ceiling reached flag is cleared when a jackpot occurs, but is not cleared unless a jackpot occurs. Therefore, once the ceiling has been reached, if the time saving cycle ends without hitting the jackpot, the ceiling reached flag will remain set (on), so the ceiling time saving will not occur from now on. The counter value is also not updated.

On the other hand, if there is a ceiling reached flag (the result of A5127 is "
Y”), if the ceiling number has not been reached (result of A5129 is “N”), small hit flag 2
It is determined whether or not it is a small hit (A5131).

The game control device 100 sets the small hit flag 2 to indicate that the result of A5131 is “
Y''), saves the signal related to the start of special pattern 2 small winning (special pattern 2 small winning signal turned on) in the test signal output data area (A5134), loads the value of the special pattern game mode flag area,
Save the special figure game mode flag in the save area (A5135).

The game control device 100 sets the small hit flag 2 when the result of A5131 is “
Y''), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 indicates a small hit (A5132). When the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (the result of A5132 is "Y"), the signal related to the start of the special symbol 1 small hit (turns on the special symbol 1 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area ( A5133), the value of the special figure game mode flag area is loaded and saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (A5135).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the production mode is in support mode B (in time saving mode #1B) (A5136). When in support mode B (result of A5136 is "Y"), that is, when a small hit result occurs during support mode B, time saving end determination processing (A5137) is executed to determine the end of time saving, and step A5138 Shift to processing. When not in support mode B (result of A5136 is "N"), that is, when a small hit result is obtained in a performance mode other than support mode B, step A51 is executed without executing the time saving end determination process.
The process moves to step 38.

Therefore, if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit (special figure 2 small hit) in support mode B, when the special figure display process is executed, that is, when the stop display of the small winning symbol ends (stop display At the end of the time, immediately before the small win fanfare or at the start of the small win fanfare), the end of the time reduction (end of general power support) is set (see FIG. 49A). In addition, even in support mode B, if the special figure 1 variable display game results in a small hit (special figure 1 small win), the time saving may not end in the time saving end determination process (A5137) (the result of A4802 is "Y"). ), but the time saving ends at least when V wins during a small hit (A3 of the specific area switch monitoring process)
215, A3217). In addition, in the case of special drawing 1 small hit, time saving (
It is also possible to have a configuration in which general electricity support always ends.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the case where a special figure 2 small hit occurs during a production mode other than support mode B (for example, during support mode A), when the special figure 2 fluctuation processing is executed, that is, the change of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. When the process ends, a time-saving end will be set (see FIG. 49A).

In this way, the end timing of time saving is different between support mode B and time saving modes other than support mode B, and is later in support mode B than in modes other than support mode B.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure command from the decorative special figure command area as a production command, prepares it (A5138), and executes the production command setting process (A51).
39). Then, prepare the small win fanfare command as a production command (A514
0), executes production command setting processing (A5141). Thereafter, the small win fanfare process transition setting process is executed (A5142), and the special figure display process is ended.

On the other hand, if neither the small hit flag 1 nor the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, if it is a loss (the results of A5131 and A5132 are "N"), the game control device 100 sets the production mode to support mode B. (in time saving mode #1B) is determined (A5143). If it is in support mode B (result of A5143 is "Y"), that is, if it is out of support mode B, the time saving end determination process (A5144) is executed to determine the end of time saving, and the process in step A5145 is executed. Transition. When not in support mode B (result of A5143 is "N")
), that is, in a case other than support mode B, the process moves to step A5145 without executing the time saving end determination process.

Therefore, if the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game loses in support mode B, if the time-saving termination conditions regarding the number of time-saving variations 1 and 2 are satisfied in the time-saving termination determination process, the special figure display At the time of execution of the intermediate processing, that is, at the end of the stop display of the lost symbol (at the end of the stop display time), the end of the time saving (end of the general power support) is set.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag indicating that a ceiling time reduction occurs (A5145). If there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (result of A5145 is "Y"), save the initial value of the number of ceiling time reductions (number of time reductions due to ceiling time reduction) in the time reduction variation number 1 area and time reduction variation number 2 area (A5146 ). The initial values of the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 and the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 (for example, 255 and 251) in the case of ceiling time reduction are saved here. Subsequently, a support operation setting process is executed to generate a time saving state due to ceiling time saving (A5150), a special figure normal process transition setting process is executed (A5151), and the special figure displaying process is ended. In the special figure normal process transition setting process, the process number related to the special figure normal process is
0" and save it in the special figure game processing number area.

If there is no ceiling time reduction activation flag indicating that a ceiling time reduction will occur (the result of A5145 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit (
A5147). Then, if the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (the result of A5147 is “
N''), it is determined whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (A5148).

If either the support hit flag 1 or the support hit flag 2 indicates a support win (the result of A5147 or A5148 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the initial value corresponding to the time reduction determination data to the time reduction fluctuation number. Save in 1 area and 2 areas of time reduction variation (A5149)
. The initial values of time reduction variation number 1 and time reduction variation number 2 (for example, 34 and 30 times, or 14 and 10 times) in the case of a support hit result (sudden time reduction) will be saved here. . Next, in order to generate a time-saving state (sudden time-saving) due to the time-saving symbol, a support operation setting process is executed (A5150), a special figure normal process transition setting process is executed (A5151), and the special figure displaying process is ended. .

In addition, since the time reduction judgment data is set corresponding to the stop symbol number in the special pattern 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) and the special pattern 2 stop pattern setting process (A3503), the initial The value (namely, the number of time reductions and the total number of time reductions) will be determined by lottery using special pattern random numbers.

If both the support hit flag 1 and the support hit flag 2 are not support hit (results of A5147 and A5148 are "N"), the game control device 100 does not execute the support operation setting process to set the time saving, and sets the special figure. The normal process transition setting process is executed (A5151), and the special figure display process is ended.

As described above, in the special figure display processing, time saving settings such as setting the number of time reductions (that is, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations) are executed regarding ceiling time reduction and sudden time reduction. In addition, regarding the time saving due to the jackpot, that is, the time saving starting from the end of the jackpot state, time saving settings such as setting the number of time saving times are executed in the jackpot ending process.

In addition, since the special figure display processing is executed when the special figure game processing timer to which the stop display time (A4704) is set reaches 0 (A2605, A2611), the stop result of the special figure fluctuation display game ( This will be executed when the display of the stop symbol) ends. Therefore, when the display of the stop result of the special figure variation display game ends (if the next special figure variation display game starts, it is approximately equal to the start time), the time reduction variation number (A5146, A5149) is set, A time saving state due to a ceiling time reduction and a sudden time reduction starts.

[Fanfare/interval processing transition setting process 1]
Next, fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1 (
A5126) will be explained in detail. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1.

The game control device 100 first sets "7", which is the processing number related to the fanfare/interval processing (A5301), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (
A5302).

Next, the game control device 100 sends a signal regarding the end of time saving (for example, turns off the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, turns off the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal, and turns off the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal. ) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5303). For example, in a configuration in which only the normal power open time changes even during the time saving state (during the normal power support state), the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are always turned off. After that, clear the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state (A5
304), saves a number with no time saving in the game state display number area (A5305), and saves a flag with no regular support in the regular game mode flag area (A5306).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the variable symbol discrimination flag area (A5307),
Save the special map low probability & no time saving flag in the special map game mode flag area (A5308)
. Next, save the probability information command (special map low probability & no time saving) in the power outage recovery transmission command area that saves the command output to the production control device 300 when the power outage is restored (A530
9). With the above steps, the time saving state (general power support state) ends.

Next, the gaming control device 100 clears the time reduction variation number 1 area (A5310), clears the time reduction variation number 2 area (A5311), and clears the ceiling counter area (A53).
12) Clear the ceiling time reduction activation flag area (A5313) and clear the ceiling reached flag area (A5314).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the number of production mode 1 in the production mode number area (A5315), clears the production remaining rotation number area (A5316), and saves the no-update code in the next mode transition information area. (A5317). Then, save the signal related to the right-handed hitting instruction (for example, turn on firing position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A5318).
, in order to light up the right-handed game display LED (first game status display section 57), save the number indicating right-handed game status in the game status display number 2 area (A5319), and display the normal base status in the normal base status determination area. The information other than the state is saved (A5320), and the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Small win fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
Next, the small hit fanfare process transition setting process in the special figure display process (A5134
) will be explained in detail. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small win fanfare mid-process transition setting process.

First, the gaming control device 100 selects "
3" (A5401) and save the corresponding processing number in the special figure game processing number area (
A5402).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4000 msec for 1 small winning special drawing, 1000 msec for 2 small winning special drawing) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern in the special drawing game processing timer area (A5403). . Next, it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 2 small hit (A5404). When it is a special figure 2 small hit (result of A5404 is "Y"), a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, on data of jackpot 1 signal, on data of jackpot 2 signal, on data of jackpot 3 signal) Save in the external information output data area (A5405)
, moves to the process of step A5406, and when it is not a special figure 2 small hit (result of A5404 is "N"), moves to the process of step A5406 without doing anything.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the right-handed hitting instruction (firing position designation signal 1 turned on) in the test signal output data area (A5406), and displays the right-handed hitting indication LED (first game status display section 57). In order to light up, the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5407), and the small win fanfare middle process transition setting process is ended.

[Support operation setting process]
Next, details of the support operation setting process (A5150) in the special figure display process will be explained. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of support operation setting processing.

The gaming control device 100 first saves a signal related to the time saving start in the external information output data area (A5501). As a result, when the ceiling time is shortened by reaching the ceiling number of times and the time is suddenly started to be shortened by the time-saving symbol (support hit), the signal regarding the start of the time-saving is sent to the external information terminal 7 as external information.
It is then output to an external device (such as a hall computer). Here, the signals related to the time saving start are ON data of the jackpot 2 signal and the jackpot 4 signal. In this way, at the start of the ceiling time reduction (specific game state B) and the sudden time reduction (specific game state C), the four jackpot signals are specially transmitted as external information. As described later, at the start of time saving associated with a jackpot (specific gaming state A, support mode A, B), the jackpot 4 signal is not transmitted as external information, so the type of time saving state (time saving associated with a jackpot and its It has the advantage of being able to distinguish between

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the signal regarding the time saving start in the test signal output data area (A5502). As a result, at the start of ceiling time reduction and sudden time reduction, a signal related to the start of time reduction is output as a test signal to the sight-fire test device. The signals related to the time saving start here are, for example, ON data of the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, ON data of the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal, and ON data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal. Then, save the number with time saving in the game status display number area (A5503), save the flag with regular support support in the regular game mode flag area (A5504), and save the special figure low probability & The time saving flag is synthesized (A5505). Subsequently, a signal related to the right-handed game instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5506), and a number indicating the right-handed game status is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A5507).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the production mode information address table (A550
8), Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503)
) etc. to obtain the address of the table corresponding to the production mode transition information set (A550
9) Acquire and save the production mode number (production mode number) of the production mode based on the table (A5510). With this, it is possible to select the production mode that changes to the ceiling time reduction and the sudden time reduction start.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of rotations remaining in the performance mode (initial value) based on the table (A5511). For example, the number of rotations remaining for presentation (initial value) is the number of time reductions (initial value of time reduction variation number 1 or time reduction variation number 2). Thereby, for example, the same performance mode can be continued until the time saving ends.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information about transition to the next mode from the production mode during ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction, based on the table (A5
512). Then, prepare a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag and the newly set production mode number as a production command (A5513), and save the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area when power is restored (A5514). ), executes a production command setting process for setting the probability information command as a production command (A5515). here,
The probability information command includes information on the probability state, the presence or absence of time saving (general power support), and the performance mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation number as an effect command (A5516), and executes an effect command setting process (A5517).
Then, time reduction variation number commands corresponding to each of the time reduction variation number 1 and time reduction variation number 2 (in this case, the initial value of the time reduction number and the total time reduction number) are prepared as production commands (A5518), and production command settings are made. The process is executed (A5519).

After that, the gaming control device 100 clears the time reduction determination data area (A5520),
The production mode transition information area is cleared (A5521), information other than the normal base state is saved in the normal base state determination area (A5522), and the support operation setting process is ended. Also, here, since the ceiling time reduction has been activated, the ceiling time reduction activation flag area in which the ceiling time reduction activation flag is stored may be cleared.

[Special figure normal process transition setting process]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process (A5151) in the process during special figure display will be explained. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal process transition setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets "0" related to the special figure normal processing as the processing number (A
5601), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5602). Thereafter, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A5603), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A5604), and the special symbol normal process transition setting process is ended.

[Small win fanfare process]
Next, details of the small win fanfare process (A2612) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small win fanfare process.

The game control device 100 first sets "4" related to the small hit opening process as the process number (A5801), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A5802).
.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the small hit opening time, which is the opening time of the big winning opening in the small winning game, in the special figure game processing timer area in accordance with the small winning stop symbol pattern (A5803). Then, the initial value of the small winning operation corresponding to the small winning stop symbol pattern is saved in the small winning control pointer area (A5804). In this embodiment, since the small hit stop symbol pattern of special figure 1 and the small hit stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 are different (see FIGS. 70 and 71), the small hit opening time and the initial value of the small hit operation are at least as follows: There is a difference between special drawing 1 small winning and special drawing 2 small winning. In addition, the initial value of the small winning operation is 38 for 1 small winning special figure and 0 for 2 small winning special drawings. Therefore, the opening pattern of the big winning hole due to the small hit will be different between the special drawing 1 small winning and the special drawing 2 small winning.

Next, the game control device 100 sends a signal related to the start of the small winning operation (for example, turns on the special electric accessory 1 operating signal, turns on the condition device activation area 1 valid signal, and turns on the activation area 1 of the accessory continuous activation device.
The valid signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5805). Next, in order to open the special big prize opening (here, the opening/closing door 39c of the variable winning device 39), the big winning hole solenoid outputs ON data for turning on the big winning hole solenoid (here, the big winning hole solenoid 39b). Save in the data area (A5806).

After that, the gaming control device 100 clears the information in the big winning hole count area that stores the number of wins in the big winning hole (A5807), and saves the lever solenoid operation initial value in the lever solenoid control pointer area (A5808). . In addition, regardless of the opening pattern of the big prize opening,
The on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b, ie, the opening/closing operation of the specific region 86, is constant.

Next, the gaming control device 100 clears the specific area passing information area (A5809), clears the area for the number of fraudulent winnings in the big winning opening (A5810), and sets the fraud monitoring period out of the flag area in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. Save (A5811) and end the small win fanfare process.

[Processing during small hit release]
Next, details of the small hit opening process (A2613) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during small winning opening.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the value of the small hit control pointer is greater than or equal to the small win operation end value (here, 38) (A5901). In this embodiment, regarding the special figure 1 small hit, since the small winning operation end value and the small winning operation initial value are the same value (38), the small winning opening time (A5803) due to one small winning is the large winning opening. This is an opening pattern in which the gate is opened only once. Regarding the special figure 2 small win, since the small win operation end value (38) is larger than the small win operation initial value (0), it becomes an opening pattern in which the big winning hole is opened multiple times by one small win. In this way, the opening pattern of the big winning hole due to a small hit is different between the special drawing 1 small winning and the special drawing 2 small winning.

And, although it is difficult for a V winning to occur in a special drawing 1 small winning that opens the big winning opening once, a V winning easily occurs in a special drawing 2 small winning that opens the big winning opening a plurality of times. For this reason, basically, the time saving does not end when the special drawing 1 small winning is difficult to generate a V winning, but the time saving ends when the special drawing 2 small winning is easy to occur.

If the value of the control pointer during small winning is less than the small winning operation end value (the result of A5901 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 executes the small winning operation transition setting process (A5902) and indicates that the small winning is in progress. The control pointer is updated by +1 (A5903), and the small winning process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the small hit control pointer is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (the result of A5901 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets "5" as the processing number related to the small hit remaining ball processing.
” (A5904) and save the corresponding processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5
905). Next, save the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 0.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A5906), save the off data in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (A5907), and release the small hit. Finish intermediate processing.

[Small winning operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the small winning operation transition setting process (A5902) in the small winning opening process will be explained. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small winning operation transition setting process.

The gaming control device 100 first executes branch processing according to the control pointer (small hit control pointer) (A6101). If the control pointer is 0, save the wait time 1 (for example, 2860 msec) corresponding to the control pointer in the special figure game processing timer area (A61).
02), save the off data in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (A6103),
The small winning operation transition setting process ends.

If the control pointer is an odd number, the gaming control device 100 saves the big winning opening opening time (for example, 48 msec) corresponding to the control pointer in the special figure game processing timer area (A6104).
), saves the ON data in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (A6105), and ends the small winning operation transition setting process.

The game control device 100 executes branch processing according to the control pointer (small hit control pointer) (A6101). If the control pointer is an even number (does not include 0), save the wait time 2 (for example, 424 msec) corresponding to the control pointer in the special game processing timer area (A6106), and save the off data in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Save (A6
107), the small winning operation transition setting process is ended.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball process (A2614) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of small hit remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the remaining ball counter is 0 (A630).
1). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (the result of A6301 is "N"), the small hit remaining ball processing is ended without doing anything. When the remaining ball counter is 0 (result of A6301 is "Y")
, it is determined whether the V abnormal winning flag is set (A6302). If there is abnormal passage information in the specific area passage information area, it means that the V abnormal winning flag is set. V
If the abnormal winning flag is set (the result of A6302 is "Y"), the irregular occurrence flag is saved in the irregular jackpot flag area (A6303), and step A63
If the V abnormal winning flag is not set (the result of A6302 is "N"), the process moves to step A6304 without doing anything.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small winning ending command corresponding to the small winning stop symbol pattern as a production command (A6304), and executes production command setting processing (A6305). In this embodiment, since the small hit stop symbol pattern of special drawing 1 and the small winning stop symbol pattern of special drawing 2 are different (see FIGS. 70 and 71), the small winning ending command and the small winning ending effect are at least as follows: It may be different for special figure 1 small hit and special figure 2 small hit. Then, set "6" for the small hit end processing as the processing number (A63
06), save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6307).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the small winning ending time (for example, 1.1 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A6308), and sends a signal regarding the end of the small winning operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 Save (turn off operating signal, turn off conditional device operating area 1 valid signal, turn off accessory continuous operating device operating area 1 valid signal) in the test signal output data area (A6309)
. Next, the information in the large winning opening count area is cleared (A6310), and the information in the small winning control pointer area is cleared (A6311).

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 saves the no-update code in the lever solenoid control pointer area (A6312) and clears the lever solenoid control timer area (A6313).
). As a result, the on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b, that is, the opening/closing operation of the specific region 86 is completed, and the specific region 86 is maintained in the closed state. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6314), and the small winning remaining ball processing is ended.

[Small winning end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end process (A2615) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit end process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the specific area passing flag is set to the specific area passing area (A6401). When there is a V winning prize, a specific area passage flag is set. If the specific area passing flag is set due to V winning (A64
01 is "Y"), a command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared as a production command (A6402), and production command setting processing is executed (A6403).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (special figure low probability & no time saving) as a production command (A6404), and executes production command setting processing (A6405). Then, the fanfare command is prepared as a production command (A6406), and production command setting processing is executed (A6407). Thereafter, "7" is set as the process number related to the fanfare/interval process (A6408), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A6409).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the jackpot fanfare time regarding the jackpot via the small win in the special figure game processing timer area (A6410). The jackpot fanfare time is, for example, 100 msec, but it may be varied depending on the small winning symbol or production mode. Incidentally, a jackpot via a small hit is a jackpot due to a V winning during a small winning (V winning jackpot).

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves 1 in the round number area to set the round number to 1 (A6411). As a result, the small winning round (opening of the big prize opening) is treated as the first round, so the jackpot round after the small winning (V winning jackpot) starts from the second round. That is, the opening of the big prize opening that continues from a small hit to a big win is counted as a round. Then, clear the specific area passage information area (A6412) and save the signal regarding the end of the small hit (for example, turn off the special symbol 1 small win signal, turn off the special symbol 2 small win signal) in the test signal output data area. (A6424).

If there is no V winning and the specific area passage flag is not set (the result of A6401 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag indicating that a ceiling time reduction will occur. (A6413). If there is no ceiling time reduction activation flag (the result of A6413 is "N"), the process moves to step A6416 without doing anything. If there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (the result of A6413 is "Y"), save the initial value of the number of ceiling time reductions (the number of time reductions due to ceiling time reduction) in the time reduction variation number 1 area and time reduction variation number 2 area (A6414 ).
If you reach the ceiling number of small winning fluctuation display games and do not win a V prize, the initial values of time reduction fluctuation number 1 and time reduction fluctuation number 2 (for example, 255 times and 251 times) in the case of ceiling time reduction are set here. It will be saved. Subsequently, support operation setting processing is executed to generate a time saving state due to ceiling time saving (A6415).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure time is being reduced (in a time saving state) based on the flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A6416). If the flag in the special figure game mode flag area is the special figure low probability & time saving flag, it can be determined that the special figure time is being reduced.
When the special figure time is being shortened (the result of A6416 is "Y"), the process moves to step A6419. In addition, if the special figure time is not being shortened (the result of A6416 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed shot instruction (for example, turning off firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (
A6417), in order to turn off the right-handed game display LED (first game status display section 57), save the left-handed game number in the game status display number 2 area (A6418), and step A6.
The process moves to step 419.

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets "0" for the special figure normal process as the process number (A6419), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6420).
After that, clear the production mode transition information area (A6421), save the signals related to the end of the small hit (for example, turn off the jackpot 1 signal, turn off the jackpot 3 signal) in the external information output data area (A6422), Clear the game mode flag save area (A6423).
Then, a signal regarding the end of the small hit (for example, turn off the special symbol 1 small hit signal, special symbol 2
(Small hit signal off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6424).

Next, the game control device 100 clears the large winning opening illegal winning number area (A6425), clears the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area (A6426), and ends the small winning end process.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
Next, details of the fanfare/interval process (A2616) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fanfare/interval processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the remaining ball counter is 0 (A650).
1). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (result of A6501 is "N"), the fanfare/interval process is ended. In addition, if the remaining ball counter is not 0, the processing number remains "7" and the special figure game processing timer is not changed and is maintained at 0, so the fanfare/interval processing will be executed at the next timer interrupt. become.

The game control device 100 determines that when the remaining ball counter is 0 (the result of A6501 is “Y”),
), updates the number of rounds in the special gaming state by +1 (A6502), and prepares a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state (jackpot state) as a production command (A6503).
), performs production command setting processing (A6504).

After that, the gaming control device 100 sets the processing number to "8" related to the big winning hole opening process (A6505), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6506). Then, save the big prize opening opening time (for example, 25 seconds) in the special game processing timer area (A6
507), save the signal related to the start of opening the grand prize opening (for example, turn on the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A6508), and save the signal related to the opening of the grand prize opening, which is the number of prizes won in the grand prize opening. Clear the mouth count (A6509). Then, save the on data in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (A6510), and clear the big winning opening illegal winnings area (A6510).
6511), save the out-of-fraud monitoring period flag in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6
512), the fanfare/interval process ends.

[Big prize opening process]
Next, details of the big prize opening process (A2617) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big winning hole opening process of this embodiment.

The game control device 100 first calculates the current round number and RW in the special game state being executed.
It is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area of M (A6601). If it is not the final round (the result of A6601 is "N"), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared as a production command (A6602), and production command setting processing is executed (A6603).

If it is the final round (the result of A6601 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 prepares a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction determination data as a production command (A6
604), and performs production command setting processing (A6605). Then, an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared as a performance command (A6606), and a performance command setting process is executed (A6607).
.

After that, the processing number is set to "9" related to the big winning hole remaining ball processing (A6608), and the processing number is saved in the special drawing game processing number area (A6609). Next, the remaining ball processing time (for example, 900 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A6610), and then the off data for turning off the big winning hole solenoid is saved in the big winning hole solenoid output data area (A6611). ), the big prize opening opening process ends.

[Big winning hole remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning hole remaining ball process (A2618) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big winning hole remaining ball process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the remaining ball counter is 0 (A680).
1). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (result of A6801 is "N"), the big prize opening remaining ball process is ended.

The game control device 100 determines that when the remaining ball counter is 0 (the result of A6801 is “Y”),
), compares the current number of rounds in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit value area to determine whether the current round is the final round (A6
802).

Then, if the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (the result of A6802 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the interval time (for example, 100 msec)
is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A6803). Then, the process number "7" related to the fanfare/interval process is set (A6804), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A6805).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal (for example, turning off the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) regarding the end of opening of the big winning opening (special variable winning device) in the test signal output data area (A
6806), ends the big winning hole remaining ball processing.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (the result of A6802 is "Y"), the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and production mode is set (
A6807), save the ending time in the special game processing timer area (A6808
). Then, "10" is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (A6809), and the process number is saved in the special pattern game process number area (A6810).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal (for example, turning off the special electric accessory 1 operating signal) regarding the end of opening the big winning opening (special variable winning device) in the test signal output data area (A6811). Next, clear the information in the big winning hole count area that stores the number of wins in the big winning hole (A6812), clear the information in the round number area that stores the number of rounds in the special gaming state (A6813), Clear the information in the round number upper limit value area that stores the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the gaming state (A6814), and clear the round number upper limit value information area (A68).
15) Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A681
6), Finish the big winning hole remaining ball processing.

[Jackpot end process]
Next, details of the jackpot end process (A2619) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot end processing.

The game control device 100 first executes the jackpot end setting process (A6901), sets the production mode information address table (A6902), and executes the production set in the special pattern 1 stop pattern setting process or the special pattern 2 stop pattern setting process. Mode transition information (A4009, A4014, A4109,
The address of the table corresponding to A4114) is acquired (A6903), and the performance mode number (performance mode number) of the performance mode set after the end of the jackpot state is acquired and saved (A6904). This allows you to select the production mode to which you want to transition after the jackpot ends.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of rotations remaining in the performance (initial value) of the performance mode set after the end of the jackpot (A6905). For example, the number of rotations remaining in the performance (initial value) is the number of time reductions (initial value of the number of changes in time reduction), etc., and after the end of the jackpot, the same performance mode can be continued until the time reduction ends.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information on transition to the next mode of the production mode set immediately after the end of the jackpot state (A6906). Then, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set production mode number etc. is prepared as a production command (A6907), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area when power is restored (A6908), and the probability information command is A production command setting process for setting the production command as a production command is executed (A6909). Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state after the end of the jackpot state, the presence or absence of time saving (general electricity support), and production mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation number as an effect command (A6910), and executes an effect command setting process (A6911).
Then, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number 2 (in this case, the initial value of the number of time reductions, for example, 7 times, 200 times) is prepared as a production command (A6912), and production command setting processing is executed. (A6913).

After that, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number related to the special figure normal processing (
A6914), save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6915).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signals related to the end of the jackpot (for example, turn off the jackpot 1 signal, turn off the jackpot 3 signal, and turn off the jackpot 4 signal) in the external information output data area (A6916), and Save signals related to termination (for example, turn off the condition device operation signal, turn off the accessory continuous operation device operation signal, turn off the special symbol 1 hit signal, and turn off the special symbol 2 hit signal) in the test signal output data area. (A6917).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the information in the time reduction determination flag area (A691).
8) Clear the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of jackpot (
A6919), information in the production mode transition information area is cleared (A6920). Then, the specific area passage information area (irregular information area) is cleared (A6921), the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (A6922), and the jackpot ending process is ended.

[Jackpot end setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process (A6901) in the jackpot end process will be explained. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the stop symbol pattern is symbol type 1 (A7001). In this embodiment, symbol type 1 is the jackpot symbol of 3R normal jackpot C and the 3R normal jackpot C jackpot symbol.
R This is the small winning symbol of normal small winning A, but it is not limited to this. In addition, 3R is
Indicates that the upper limit for the number of rounds is 3. In the 3R normal small win, the first round is a small win round (opening of the big winning hole), and the second and third rounds are V winning jackpot rounds.

When the stop symbol pattern is symbol type 1 (result of A7001 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines that the game state at the time of the hit is short time mode based on the information of the special symbol game mode flag evacuation area. (In other words, power supply support is available) (A7002). In addition, the time of winning is when the small winning symbol or the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation display game ends (for example, when the special symbol displaying process is executed, or when the stop display time ends). (or just before the fanfare of a small or jackpot). If the special figure low probability & time saving flag is stored in the special figure game mode flag save area (A5111, A5135) where information is saved in the case of a small hit or jackpot, the game state at the time of winning is time saving. If it can be determined that it is in the middle and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is stored, it can be determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is in the middle of no time saving.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the case of a hit (small hit or jackpot) in support mode B, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed and the gaming state at the time of the win is with time saving (with general power support) ( (See FIGS. 49A and 49B). However, if you win in a time saving mode other than support mode B, if the end of the time saving is set when the winning special symbol fluctuation display game ends, the game state at the time of the win will be ``with time saving''. (See FIG. 49A). In this embodiment, in a time saving mode other than support mode B, when the special figure 2 variable display game is won, the time is not saved, but when the special figure 1 variable display game is won, the time saver is in effect. Also, as a matter of course, the gaming state when winning in the normal gaming state (normal mode, remaining hold extinguishment mode) is also in the state of no time saving.

When the game control device 100 hits a hit with the stop symbol pattern of symbol type 1 (hit stop display) and there is no time saving (result of A7002 is "N"), the game control device 100 displays a regular symbol in the regular symbol game mode flag area. Save the no support flag (A7003), save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A7004), and clear the time reduction variation number 1 area and time reduction variation number 2 area (A7005). ), the normal base state information is saved in the normal base state determination area (A7006).

In this way, if there is no time saving when you hit with the stop symbol pattern of symbol type 1,
The gaming state after the jackpot ends is not a time saving state (general power support state, time saving mode) but a normal gaming state (normal mode). Note that after the jackpot ends, it includes not only after the end of a direct jackpot that is not due to a V winning, but also after the jackpot ends when a V winning jackpot occurs during a small win.

On the other hand, when the time is shortened when the stop symbol pattern of symbol type 1 hits (during hit stop display), the process from step A7016 onwards is executed.
By this, if you hit with the stop symbol pattern of symbol type 1 and the time is shortened,
As described later, the gaming state after the jackpot is such that the initial value of time reduction variation number 1 (total time reduction number) is 11 times, and the initial value of time reduction variation number 2 (time reduction number of times) is 7. state (time saving mode #1B (support mode B)).

When the stopped symbol pattern is not symbol type 1 (the result of A7001 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the stopped symbol pattern is symbol type 2 (A7007).
In this embodiment, the symbol type 2 is the jackpot symbol of 3R normal jackpot A, 3R normal jackpot B, 10R normal jackpot B, and the small hit symbol of 10R normal small win B, but is not limited to these. . Note that 3R and 10R indicate that the upper limit values for the number of rounds are 3 and 10, respectively. In the 10R normal small win, the first round is a small win round (opening of the big winning hole), and the 2nd to 10th rounds are V winning jackpot rounds.

When the stop symbol pattern is symbol type 2 (the result of A7007 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the processing from step A7016 onwards. As a result, when the stop symbol pattern is symbol type 2, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is such that the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 (total number of time reductions) is 11, and the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 The value (time saving number) is 7
This will result in a time-saving state.

When the stop symbol pattern is not symbol type 2 (the result of A7007 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the stop symbol pattern is symbol type 4 (A7008).
In this embodiment, symbol type 4 is the jackpot symbols of 10R normal jackpot A and 10R normal jackpot C, but is not limited to this.

The game control device 100, when the stop symbol pattern is not symbol type 4 (the result of A7008 is "N"), that is, when the stop symbol pattern is symbol type 3 (other than symbol types 1, 2, and 4), Based on the information of the special figure game mode flag save area, it is determined whether the game state at the time of winning is in the time saving mode (A7009). Step A7009 is step A7
This is the same process as 002. In this embodiment, symbol type 3 is a small winning symbol of 10R normal small winning A, but is not limited to this.

When the game control device 100 hits a hit with the stop symbol pattern of symbol type 3 (while the hit stop is displayed) and the time is shortened (the result of A7009 is "Y"), the game control device 100 outputs a signal regarding the start of the time shortening as external information. Save in the external information output data area (A7011). The signals related to the start of time saving are the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal and the ON data of the jackpot 3 signal, but since the jackpot 2 signal is turned on during the jackpot, it continues.

Next, the game control device 100 sends a signal regarding the start of time saving (turns on the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal, turns on the special symbol 2 variable time shortening state signal, and turns on the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal). Save in the test signal output data area (A7012). Then, the regular map support flag is saved in the regular map game mode flag area (A7013), and the special map low probability & time saving flag is saved in the special map game mode flag area (A7014).

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 saves 204 in the time reduction variation number 1 area, saves 200 in the time reduction variation number 2 area (A7015), and ends the jackpot end setting process.
By this, if you hit with the stop symbol pattern of symbol type 3 and the time is shortened,
The gaming state after the jackpot is a time-saving state (time-saving mode # 1A (support mode A)). In particular, in this embodiment, when a specific small hit (symbol type 3: 10R normal small hit A) occurs in support mode B, a large time saving number of 200 times will be obtained after the jackpot ends.

When the game control device 100 hits a hit with the stop symbol pattern of symbol type 3 (hit stop display) and there is no time saving (result of A7009 is "N"), the game control device 100 sends a signal regarding the start of time saving as external information. Save in the external information output data area (A7016). In addition, the signal related to the start of time saving here does not have the on data of the jackpot 3 signal, but only the on data of the jackpot 2 signal, but since the jackpot 2 signal is turned on from the middle of the jackpot, it will continue. .

In this way, the ON data of the jackpot 3 signal is in the time saving state (7 time saving times) after the jackpot ends.
Although it is not sent to the external device when the time saving mode #1B (support mode B) is selected (A701
6), Time saving state with 200 time saving times after the jackpot ends (time saving mode #1A (support mode A)
), it will be transmitted to the external device (A7011). Therefore, the external information signal sent to the external device when starting the time saving state (when the jackpot ends) is different depending on the number of time saving times after the end of the jackpot, so the type of time saving state after the end of the jackpot is transmitted to the external device. It has the advantage of being able to distinguish between

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the start of time saving in the test signal output data area (A7017), saves the general pattern support flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (A7018), and sets the special pattern game mode. Save the special map low probability & time saving flag in the flag area (A7019).

Next, the game control device 100 sets 11 to the time reduction variation number 1 area and sets the time reduction variation number 2 to the time reduction variation number 1 area.
7 is saved in the area (A7020), and the jackpot end setting process is ended. As a result, if there is no time saving when a stop symbol pattern of symbol type 3 (10R normal small hit A) hits, the gaming state after the jackpot is the initial value of the time reduction variation number 1 (total time reduction number) is 11
times, and the time saving state (time saving mode #1B (support mode B)) is established in which the initial value of the time saving fluctuation number 2 (time saving number of times) is 7 times.

When the stop symbol pattern is symbol type 4 (result of A7008 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines that the game state at the time of the hit is short time mode based on the information in the special symbol game mode flag evacuation area. It is determined whether or not (A7010). In this embodiment, symbol type 4 is the jackpot symbols of 10R normal jackpot A and 10R normal jackpot C, but is not limited to this.

The game control device 100 executes the processing from step A7011 onwards when there is no time saving (result of A7010 is "N") when a hit is made with the stop symbol pattern of symbol type 4 (during the hit stop display). . As a result, if there is no time saving when a stop symbol pattern of symbol type 4 is hit, the gaming state after the jackpot is such that the initial value of time reduction variation number 1 (total time reduction number) is 204, and the time A time saving state (time saving mode #1A (support mode A)) is entered in which the initial value of the number of shortening fluctuations 2 (time saving number) is 200 times. In particular, in this embodiment, when a specific jackpot (symbol type 4) occurs in the normal gaming state, a large time saving number of 200 times will be obtained after the jackpot ends.

The game control device 100 executes the processing from step A7016 onwards when the time is shortened (result of A7010 is "Y") when the game wins with the stop symbol pattern of symbol type 4 (during hit stop display). As a result, if there is a time reduction when the stop symbol pattern of symbol type 4 hits, the gaming state after the jackpot is such that the initial value of the time reduction variation number 1 (total time reduction number) is 11, and the time A time saving state where the initial value of the number of shortening fluctuations 2 (time saving number) is 7 times (
The mode becomes time saving mode #1B (support mode B).

By the above jackpot end setting process, the type of gaming state after the jackpot ends (normal gaming state, several types etc.) will be determined.

[Time chart (with or without time reduction)]
FIGS. 49A and 49B are time charts showing changes in the presence or absence of time saving (that is, the presence or absence of general electricity support) due to the above-described special figure game processing. Figure 49A shows how the presence or absence of time savings changes with a small hit (+V winning jackpot), and Figure 49B shows how the presence or absence of time savings changes with a direct jackpot (a jackpot that does not go through a small hit). shows.

As shown in FIG. 49A, in the case of a time-saving mode other than support mode B (particularly support mode A), the special figure fluctuation display game fluctuation (small hit fluctuation) that results in a small hit ends (stops) due to the special figure game processing. Sometimes, the end of the time reduction is set, and the state changes from the state with general power support (with support) to the state without general power support (no support). On the other hand, in the case of support mode B, when the stop display of the small winning symbol ends (at the end of the stop display time, immediately before the small winning fanfare, or at the start of the small winning fanfare), a short time end is set, and the general The state changes from the state with support (with support) to the state without general power support (no support).

That is, the end timing of time saving is later in support mode B than in time saving modes other than support mode B. Due to the difference in the end timing of the time saving, even if you win with the same winning symbol (for example, symbol type 3: 10R normal small hit A), the time saving mode you were staying in immediately before the hit (i.e. during the winning fluctuation display) Depending on whether the time saving mode (time saving mode) is support mode B or a mode other than support mode B, the time saving mode (gaming state with a different number of time saving times) to which the winning state is entered can be changed (see also FIGS. 71 and 72 described later). . Therefore, the range of game play is expanded and the variety of games is rich, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, the effect control device 300 can also use the difference in the end timing of the time saving to set the effect, etc. to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, FIG. 49A shows the case of the variation (special figure 2 small hit variation) of the special figure 2 variation display game resulting in a small hit result. In the case of a change in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that results in a small hit (special figure 1 small hit variation), if there is an exceptional V win during the small hit state of special figure 1 (as mentioned above, basically ), the end of time saving may be set at the time of V winning, and there is no need to set the end of time saving if there is no V winning. In addition, even in the case of the special figure 1 small hit variation, as in the case of the special figure 2 small hit variation, the end of the time saving may be set according to the support mode (time saving mode), as shown in FIG. 49A.

In addition, as another configuration, the setting timing for ending time saving may be delayed from FIG. 49A for both time saving modes other than support mode B and support mode B. For example, for time-saving modes other than support mode B, when the display of the small winning symbol ends (just before the small winning fanfare)
The end of the time saving may be set for support mode B, and the end of the time saving may be set during the small winning state or at the end of the small winning state (when the small winning ending ends). Alternatively, as another configuration, the setting timing for ending time saving may be reversed to that in FIG. 49A, and may be set earlier in support mode B than in time saving modes other than support mode B.

As shown in FIG. 49B, if the result of either the special pattern 1 variable display game or the special pattern 2 variable display game is a direct jackpot (a jackpot that is not due to V winning) due to the special pattern game processing, the time-saving The end timing depends on support mode (time-saving mode) and special map type (special map 1 or special map 2)
It doesn't depend. Similar to the small hit in support mode B, in the case of a direct jackpot, when the stop display of the stop symbol (jackpot symbol) ends (at the end of the stop display time, immediately before the jackpot fanfare, or when the jackpot fanfare starts) ), short-time termination is set, and general electricity support is available (
The state changes from the state (with support) to the state without general power support (no support).

Note that, unlike FIG. 49B, the time saving end timing is set to support mode (
It may be different depending on the time-saving mode), and in this case as well, the range of game properties is widened and the variations of the game are rich, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Puzu game processing]
Next, details of the common map game process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be explained. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the Fuzu game process. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, and the entire process related to the general figure fluctuation display game is controlled;
It sets the display of ordinary drawings, controls the opening/closing of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (ordinary electric accessory, ordinary electricity), etc.

The gaming control device 100 first executes gate switch monitoring processing to monitor the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601).

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 executes the general power winning switch monitoring process of monitoring the input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the general game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
(A7603). Note that the minimum value of the general figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the value of the regular game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

If the value of the general game processing timer is 0 (result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, if the time is up or the time has already expired, the game control device 100 sets the standard game processing number to A general game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to a corresponding process is set in a register (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general game process number based on the set standard game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made based on the general game process number, and a game branching process corresponding to the general game process number is executed (A7607).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A7607, the gaming control device 100
It monitors the start of the fluctuation of the general pattern fluctuation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the general pattern fluctuation display game, sets the effect, and sets the information necessary to perform the processing during the general pattern fluctuation display game. Execute (A7608).

In addition, if the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the process during normal pattern fluctuation for setting information necessary for performing the process during normal pattern display ( A7609). For example, in the process during general figure fluctuation, in order to move to the process during general figure display, in addition to setting "2" as the game process number and saving in the general figure game processing number area, the general figure display time is Save in processing timer area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, if the result of the general map fluctuation display game is a win, the game control device 100 sets the general power opening time, and performs processing during the general map winning. A general map display process is executed to set information necessary for performing the following (A7610). For example, in the general pattern display process, if the result of the general pattern fluctuation display game is a win, in order to move to the general pattern winning process, set "3" as the game processing number and enter the general pattern game processing number area. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, in order to shift to the regular game processing number, "0" is set as the game processing number and saved in the regular game processing number area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "3" in step A7607, the gaming control device 100 performs a general operation such as setting information necessary to continue the process during the normal game or to perform the process of remaining normal electricity balls. The drawing processing is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal game winning process, after setting is made to open the normal variable prize winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, in order to move to the general ball remaining ball process, "4" is set as the game processing number. Save in the Fuzu game processing number area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the general power remaining ball process to set the information necessary to perform the general map per end process (A7612 ). For example, in the process of remaining spheres on a general map, in order to move to the end process for a general map, in addition to setting "5" as the game processing number and saving it in the general game processing number area, the general game ending time is Save in processing timer area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal pattern per end process that sets information necessary for performing the normal pattern normal process (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the common pattern winning end process, in order to proceed to the normal pattern processing, "0" is set as the game process number and saved in the general pattern game processing number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display 53 (A7614). Thereafter, a symbol fluctuation control process for controlling the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol) by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the ordinary symbol game process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the general game processing timer is not 0 (A7604
If the result is "N"), that is, the time has not expired, the processes from step A7614 onwards are executed.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1318) in the timer interrupt process will be explained. 51A and 51B are flowcharts showing the procedure of external information editing processing. FIG. 51A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 51B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, payout command sending process (A1307), winning opening switch/
Status monitoring processing (A1308), magnet fraud monitoring processing (A1314), board radio wave fraud monitoring processing (
Based on the monitoring result in step A1315), processing is performed to create information to be output to external devices such as an information collection terminal and an internal management device of the amusement park, and to a test firing test device, and to set it in an output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (
A9301). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (A9301 result is "N"),
Determine whether a main frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9302)
. If a main body frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9302 is "N"), the off data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9303).

If a glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9301 is "Y"), or if a main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9302 is "Y"),
The ON data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9305), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9306).

After steps A9303 and A9306, the gaming control device 100 saves the off data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9304). If the security signal control timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (A9307), and it is determined whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time has expired or not) (A9308). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time period (for example, 256 msec) when data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch (setting value change switch 102).
c) is set (A1046 of main processing). Then, the security signal control timer starts counting from the time when the RAM is initialized.

If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9308 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 saves the security signal ON data in the external information output data area (A
9309), the process moves to step A9310. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

If the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9308 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not magnet fraud is occurring (A9310). Note that if there is a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, it can be determined that magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9310 is "N"), it is further determined whether board radio wave fraud is occurring (A9311). Note that if there is a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, it can be determined that board radio wave fraud is occurring.

The gaming control device 100 determines if board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9311 is “N”).
, Furthermore, it is determined whether or not frame radio fraud is occurring (A9312). If there is a frame radio fraud signal, it can be determined that frame radio fraud is occurring. If frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (result of A9312 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not grand prize opening fraud is occurring (A9313). In addition, if the winning opening switch/state monitoring process saves the fraudulent winning occurrence flag regarding the big winning opening in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that the big winning opening fraud is occurring. If the grand prize opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A9313 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the regular electricity fraud is occurring (A9314). In addition, when the fraudulent winning occurrence flag regarding the second starting winning opening of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the fraudulent flag area by the winning opening switch/state monitoring process, it can be determined that the normal electricity fraud is occurring.

When the power supply fraud is not occurring (the result of A9314 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not vibration fraud is occurring (A9315). Note that if there is a detection signal from the vibration sensor 65, it can be determined that vibration fraud is occurring. If a vibration error is not occurring (A9315 result is "N"), it is determined whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (A93
16). Note that when the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1317), it can be determined that an abnormal discharge error is occurring.

If the abnormal discharge error is not occurring (the result of A9316 is “N”), the gaming control device 100
”), it is determined whether a V passing error is occurring (A9317). If the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 is generated at an inappropriate timing, it can be determined that a V passing error is occurring. If a V passing error is not occurring (the result of A9317 is "N"), it is determined whether a remaining ball error, which is an error related to a remaining ball, is occurring (A9318). If the remaining ball error is not occurring (the result of A9318 is "N"), it is determined whether the safety device is in operation based on the safety device in operation flag (A9319). If the safety device is not operating (A9319 result is "N"), determine whether a switch abnormality error is occurring (
A9320).

If a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of the switch connector is not occurring (the result of A9320 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 saves the off data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (A9321). . If a switch abnormality error is occurring (
If the result of A9320 is "Y"), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9323).

On the other hand, if the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9310 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100
''), if board radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A9311 is "Y"), if frame radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A9312 is "Y"), grand prize opening fraud is occurring. Case (A93
13 result is "Y"), if power supply irregularity is occurring (A9314 result is "Y"), if vibration irregularity is occurring (A9315 result is "Y"), an abnormal discharge error occurs. (A9316 result is "Y"), a V passing error is occurring (A9317 result is "Y"), a remaining ball error is occurring (A9318 result is "Y") ), if the safety device is in operation (result of A9319 is "Y"), saves the on data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9322), and outputs the on data of the gaming machine error status signal as a test signal. Save in the data area (A9323). By setting the security signal to ON data, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. In this embodiment, the safety device is in operation when the safety device activation flag=1.

In this way, when the safety device is in operation (the result of A9319 is "Y"), the security signal is turned on and output to an external device such as a hall computer (A9322).
, the person in charge of the game center, the attendant, etc. can recognize that the safety device is in operation. In addition to a configuration in which a security signal is continuously output to an external device while the safety device is in operation, a configuration in which a security signal is output for one pulse (e.g. 256 ms) to an external device when the safety device is activated is also possible. It is. Further, instead of the security signal or in combination with the security signal, external information may be provided exclusively for the safety device, and the dedicated external information may be output to the external device while the safety device is in operation.

In addition, if the safety device is in operation (the result of A9319 is "Y"), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area, and the gaming machine error state signal is used as a test signal in the test shooting test device. Output to. Note that a configuration is also possible in which the test signal (gaming machine error state signal) corresponding to the fact that the safety device is in operation is not output. Further, a test signal other than the gaming machine error state signal may be output to the sight test device.

After steps A9321 and A9323, the gaming control device 100 executes a starting opening signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the starting opening (A9324). Next, main prize ball signal editing processing is executed to set information regarding the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out (A9325), and the symbol confirmation number signal generated when the stop symbol of the special symbol fluctuation display game is determined is transmitted to the external device. The symbol confirmation number signal editing process is executed to be outputted to (A9326), and the external information editing process is ended.

[Safety device related processing]
Next, details of the safety device related process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be explained. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of safety device related processing. The safety device related process is an intra-area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned intra-area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device is in operation based on the safety device in operation flag in the safety device in operation flag area included in the intra-area work area (A940
1). If the safety device operating flag=1, it can be determined that the safety device is operating. If the safety device is in operation (result of A9401 is “Y”), the safety device related processing is ended.

When the safety device is not in operation (the result of A9401 is “N”), the game control device 100
, load the safety device operation information from the safety device operation information area included in the out-of-area work area (
A9402), determine whether the safety device operation information is the value of the old operation information area (A94
03). When the safety device operation information is the value of the old operation information area (the result of A9403 is “Y”)
''), since there is no change in the safety device activation information, the process moves to step A9409 without setting (sending) the production command.

When the safety device operation information is not the value of the old operation information area, the game control device 100 (A94)
03 result is "N"), and there is a change in the safety device operation information, so in order to set (send) the production command, a safety device operation related command table that associates the safety device operation information and commands is set (A9404 ), commands corresponding to safety device activation information (ACTION section)
(A9405). Then, it is determined whether there is no command definition (A94
06). In the safety device activation related command table, the command corresponding to the safety device non-activation information (value 0) is not defined (because there is no command), so the safety device activation information is the safety device non-activation information (value 0). In this case, it can be determined that the command is not defined. If there is no command definition (result of A9406 is "Y"), the process moves to step A9409 without setting (sending) the production command.

If there is a command definition (the result of A9406 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 prepares a safety device activation related command (MODE part) as a performance command (A9407).
If the safety device activation information is safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), or safety device activation information (value 3), it can be determined that a command definition is present. Then, a production command setting process for setting (sending) a production command is executed (A9408). Note that the production command consists of a MODE section and an ACTION section. In addition, in the safety device activation related command table, a command corresponding to the safety device non-activation information (value 0) is defined to omit the judgment in step A9406, and the safety device is also applied to the safety device non-activation information (value 0). It may be possible to set (send) commands related to device operation.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the safety device activation information is safety device activation information (value 3) (A9409). If the safety device operation information is not the safety device operation information (value 3) (result of A9409 is “N”), the safety device related processing is immediately terminated. on the other hand,
When the safety device activation information is the safety device activation information (value 3) (the result of A9409 is “Y”)
''), "1" indicating that the safety device is in operation is saved in the safety device in operation flag area as the safety device in operation flag (A9410), and then the safety device related process is ended. Note that if the safety device operating information (value 3) is saved in step A9804 (described later) in the previous timer interrupt process, the result of step A9409 will be "Y" in the next timer interrupt process.

As described above, when the safety device activation information changes to safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), or safety device activation information (value 3), the safety The device operation related commands include safety device operation information in part (ACTION part), and the production control device 3
00. Safety device activation-related commands correspond to the activation warning state when the ACTION part is safety device activation warning information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), and safety device activation information (value 3). The operation warning command corresponds to the operation warning state, and the operation warning command corresponds to the operation state.

By receiving the operation notice command, the production control device 300 can display an operation notice display (for example, the words "Soon to be discontinued") on the display device 41 in the state of the safety device's operation notice. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility that the game will be stopped, urge the player to finish the game, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged unintentionally.
Furthermore, it is possible to give a surprise to those committing fraud and encourage them to stop the fraud.

By receiving the activation warning command, the production control device 300 can display an activation warning display (for example, the words "The game will be discontinued after winning") on the display device 41 in the activation warning state of the safety device. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the game will be stopped after the end of the small win or the jackpot, and warn the player that he will be disadvantaged, such as the consecutive winnings being stopped. Incidentally, consecutive winnings (consecutive winnings) mean that, for example, jackpots occur continuously without going through the normal mode (or normal gaming state). Additionally, the activation warning state can give a surprise to those committing fraud and encourage them to stop the fraud.

By receiving the in-operation command, the production control device 300 can display an in-operation display 513 (for example, the characters "stopped") on the display device 41 in the operating state (in-operation state) of the safety device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent new players (customers) from using the gaming machine 10, and if there is someone who is committing fraud, it is possible to stop the fraud.

In addition, when the safety device operation information does not change and is maintained at 0, 1, 2, 3 (0 → 0, 1 → 1
, 2→2, 3→3 (no change), the safety device activation related command is sent to the performance control device 300.
is not sent to. 190 after the safety device counter value reaches 190000 to 194999.
Even when the value is less than 000 and the safety device activation information changes from 1 to 0 (change from 1 to 0), safety device activation related commands are not sent without command definition. Note that changes in the safety device operation information from 2 to 1 or from 3 to 2 (changes from 2 to 1, 3 to 2) are eliminated by the difference ball confirmation process and the safety device operation monitoring process, which will be described later.

When the safety device operation information changes from 0 to 1 (change from 0 to 1), an operation notice command among the safety device operation related commands is transmitted to the production control device 300. When the safety device activation information changes from 1 to 2 (change from 1 to 2), an activation warning command among the safety device activation related commands is transmitted to the production control device 300. When the safety device activation information changes from 2 to 3 (at the time of change from 2 to 3), an in-operation command among the safety device activation related commands is transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that when the safety device activation information changes from 2 to 3, the result of step A9403 becomes "Y" and steps A9404-A9410 are performed only once immediately after.
The operating command is sent through , and the safety device operating flag = 1, so the safety device is operating (result of A9401 is "Y"), and in the subsequent timer interrupt processing, step A940 is executed.
No safety device activation related commands are sent without passing through 4-A9410.

Furthermore, the fact that the safety device activation information directly changes from 1 to 3 (the change itself from 1 to 3)
is removed by the difference ball confirmation process and safety device operation monitoring process described later, but the safety device operation information may change instantaneously from 1 → 2 → 3 (2 is an instantaneous value and as described below) (no activation warning condition occurs). This change from 1 to 2 to 3 corresponds to the fact that the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 and shifts from the operation notice state to the operation state when there is neither a jackpot nor a small win. Then, in response to the transition from the activation notice state to the activation state of the safety device, an in-operation command is sent to the production control device 300 as a safety device activation-related command (A94
05, A9407).

[Outside area integration processing]
Next, details of the out-of-area integration process (A1321) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the extra-area integration process. The extra-area integration process is an extra-area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned extra-area program.

The gaming control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the outside work area (A9501), and sets the start of the outside stack area (stack area for outside area) in the stack pointer as the value of the outside stack area. Set an address value that indicates (
A9502). As a result, the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used is switched from the in-area stack area to the out-of-area stack area.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves (PUSH) register information (values) for both register bank 0 and register bank 1 to the outside stack area (A9503). Here, it is preferable to save all general-purpose registers. Thereafter, test signal output processing for outputting a test signal is executed (A9504). Then, performance display device control processing is executed to control the display of the performance display device 152, etc. (A9505). Subsequently, a difference ball confirmation process (A9506) is executed in which the number of difference balls (safety device counter value) is updated and safety device operation information is set corresponding to the number of difference balls (safety device counter value). Next, a safety device operation monitoring process for monitoring the operation of the safety device is executed (A9507).

After that, the gaming control device 100 restores the saved register (A9508), loads it from the stack pointer storage area and sets the stack pointer (A9509), and ends the performance display editing process. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

[Test signal output processing]
Next, details of the test signal output processing (A9504) in the out-of-area integration processing (FIG. 53) will be explained. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of test signal output processing.

The game control device 100 first loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and then outputs the data to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output (A10101). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the sight-firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A10
102).

Next, the gaming control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the data to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output to (A10103). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the sight-firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A101
04). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A10105).

The test signal output processing is executed as a test signal output processing program that is part of an out-of-area program corresponding to out-of-area processing. On the other hand, the output processing (FIG. 10) is executed as an output processing program that is part of the intra-region program corresponding to the intra-region processing. In addition, in the processing of steps A10101-A10105, the data to be output to the test terminal output ports 1-5 is read (loaded) from the internal work area of the RAM.

[Performance display device control processing]
Next, details of the performance display device control process (A9505) in the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 53) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of performance display device control processing. The performance display device control process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned out-of-area program.

The game control device 100 first executes a validity determination to determine the validity of the performance display work area, and if it is invalid and abnormal, initializes the performance display work area (including initial value setting).
(A9601). The process in step A9601 is similar to the process in step A1204 in FIG.

In addition, since the validity determination is executed every time the performance display device control process is executed, if the performance display work area is not valid, it can be initialized immediately, and abnormal performance display (abnormal base Display of values, etc.) can be prevented as much as possible.

Furthermore, when initializing the performance display work area (including initial value setting), areas other than the stack pointer storage area are initialized to protect the stack pointer storage area. Note that although the stack area outside the area is not initialized in this embodiment, it may be initialized. Even when the extra-area stack area is initialized, the values of registers saved in the extra-area stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the performance display work area is performed separately from the initialization of the intra-area work area (gaming control work area) and the intra-area stack area (gaming control stack area), so the intra-area work area and has no effect on the stack area within the area.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 executes initial display timer update processing (A9602).
In the initial display timer update process, a timer is used to control all blinking (initial display control) to blink all the LEDs of each digit of the performance display device 152 for about 5 seconds at the start of performance display (after power-on). Perform updates.

Next, the gaming control device 100 copies the switch rising edge information of the input port for which the base value is to be calculated to the performance display work area (A9603). The switch rising edge information is acquired through input processing and stored in the intra-area work area (particularly the switch control area) (A1303). As described above, in this embodiment, the input ports (input ports to be monitored) that are the targets of base value calculation are the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126. The copied switch rising edge information is processed in the performance display editing process (Figure 8).
used in

In addition, even if a game ball is detected, it does not directly change the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls, and the rising edge information (bit) of the switch that is not subject to base value calculation is copied with cleared ( mask). For example, the gate switch 34a or the specific area switch 72
The information on the remaining bulb outlet switch 73, etc. is copied in a cleared state. Thereby, in the performance display editing process, the process related to these switches (at least the clearing process of A1211) can be omitted.

In addition, the number of normal out balls is temporarily determined by the switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a,
39a, if it is updated by the input (gaming ball detection) itself at the gate switch 34a, specific area switch 72, or remaining ball ejection port switch 73, out ball detection detects all the game balls ejected from the gaming area 32. The switch 74 is redundantly updated, and the base value is calculated to be an incorrect value. In addition, the number of normal prize balls is updated by the input (game ball detection) itself at the gate switch 34a, the specific area switch 72, or the remaining ball outlet switch 73, which overlaps with the switch of the prize opening and allows game balls to pass through. If this happens, the winning opening switch will be redundantly updated, and the base value will be calculated to be an incorrect value.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes performance display device display processing (A9604). In the performance display device display process, the performance display device 15 is
Segment output data (display data and lighting pattern data related to the base value) corresponding to the base value to be displayed in 2 is set. For example, as the display period, real-time value display period B
L, 1st previous display period B1, 2nd previous display period B2, 3rd previous display period B3 are provided, and in each display period, the real-time value during measurement of the base value, the 1st previous aggregation period, and 2 times Segment output data corresponding to the base value measured in the previous aggregation interval or the three previous aggregation interval may be set.

Next, the gaming control device 100 updates the timer for switching the display period, and determines whether it is the timing to switch the display period (A9605). If it is the display period switching timing (the result of A9605 is "Y"), the display period switching setting is executed (A9606), and the performance display device control process ends. If it is not the display period switching timing (the result of A9605 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 ends the performance display device control process without executing the display period switching setting.

In the display period switching setting, the display period information is switched as follows: BL→B1→B2→B3→BL→... Further, an initial value of a timer for period switching (for example, an initial value corresponding to a predetermined period of 5 seconds) is set.

[Difference ball confirmation process]
Next, details of the difference ball confirmation process (A9506) in the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 53) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the difference ball confirmation process. The difference ball confirmation process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned out-of-area program. In the difference ball confirmation process, a safety device counter value (number of difference balls + 100,000) indicating the number of difference balls is updated, and safety device operation information indicating the state of the safety device is updated.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device is in operation based on the safety device in operation flag in the safety device in operation flag area included in the intra-area work area (A970
1). If the safety device is in operation (the result of A9701 is “Y”), the difference ball confirmation process is immediately ended, and the safety device counter value and the safety device activation information are not updated. In addition, in this embodiment, if the extra-area integrated processing program (program related to the safety device) included in the extra-area program is not executed while the game is stopped, and the safety device is activated and the game is stopped. In this case, the out-of-area integration process including the difference ball confirmation process is not executed (A13
19 is "Y"), the process of step A9701 may be omitted. Note that step A9
If the process 701 is not performed, the safety device activation flag area becomes an area that is read and written by programs within the area and is not read by programs outside the area (an area that is not accessed).

When the safety device is not in operation (the result of A9701 is “N”), the gaming control device 100
, the old operation information in the old operation information area included in the outside work area is 2 or more (old operation information area ≧
2) is determined (A9702). If the old operation information is 2 or more (A97
If the result of 02 is "Y"), the difference ball confirmation process is ended and the safety device counter value and safety device operation information are not updated.

When the old operation information is less than 2 (the result of A9702 is “N”), the game control device 100
), it is determined whether there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 based on the switch rising edge information of the switch control area (intra-area work area) regarding the fourth input port 126 (A9703). When there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 (the result of A9703 is “
Y''), it is determined whether the safety device counter value is 0 (A9704). If the safety device counter value is not 0 (the result of A9704 is "N"), the safety device counter value, which is the value in the safety device counter area, is updated by -1 (decreased by 1) (A9705). Therefore, in response to the input to the out ball detection switch 74 increasing the number of ejected balls by 1, the difference number of balls (=
(Number of safe pitches - Number of ejected pitches)) Consequently, the safety device counter value (=number of differential balls + 100,000) is decreased by 1 and updated. Next, the number of acquired game balls is loaded from the number of acquired game balls area included in the intra-area work area (A9706).

The game control device 100 determines that when there is no input to the out ball detection switch 74 (the result of A9703 is "N") or when the safety device counter value is 0 (the result of A9704 is "Y").
”), the safety device counter value is maintained without being updated by -1, and the number of acquired game balls is loaded (A9706).

Next, the gaming control device 100 loads the safety device counter value of the safety device counter area included in the outside work area (A9707), and adds the number of acquired game balls to the safety device counter value (A9708). The number of game balls acquired is the number (total) of prize balls acquired within one interruption, that is,
Since this is an increase in the number of safe balls within one interruption, in step A9708, the difference number of balls (=
(Number of safe balls - Number of ejected balls) Consequently, the safety device counter value (=number of difference balls + 100,000) will be updated by increasing by the number of acquired game balls.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the safety device counter value to the counter reference value (195000
) or more (safety device counter ≧195000 or not) (A9
709). If the safety device counter value is greater than or equal to the counter reference value (195000), (A
9709 result is "Y"), set the upper limit value (195000) to the safety device counter value to return it to the upper limit value (counter reference value of 195000) (A971
0), the upper limit value is saved in the safety device counter area as the value after addition (A9711). Note that the safety device counter value exceeds the upper limit value in step A9708 and reaches 195000+α.
Sometimes it becomes. Here, α is less than the maximum value of the number of game balls acquired (acquired within one interruption), and is smaller than, for example, the total value of prize balls when all the prize opening switches are input at the same time.

On the other hand, if the safety device counter value is less than the counter reference value (195000) (A9
If the result of step A9709 is "N"), there is no need to limit the limit to the upper limit value, so the value after addition by the addition process of step A9708 is saved as is in the safety device counter area (A9711). In this way, the safety device counter value in the safety device counter area is updated to the added value (including the value limited to the upper limit value).

In addition, by limiting the safety device counter value to the upper limit value 19500, the range (number of bytes or number of bits) of the safety device counter area becomes clear, which is convenient for developing a game control program.

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets an operation information number (here, 0 to 2) corresponding to the safety device counter value (A9712). Safety device counter value from 0 to 189999, 1900
Corresponding to the safety device counter values of 00 to 194999 and the safety device counter value of 195000, the operation information number is “0” indicating the non-operation state (normal state) of the safety device, and “1” indicating the operation advance state. ”, is set to “2” indicating an operation warning state. Note that the operation information number is not set to "3", which indicates an operating state in which the safety device is in operation. Here, if the difference number of balls related to condition (1) is set as the difference number of balls based on the lowest value (the difference number of balls in a predetermined period from the time of the lowest value to the present) as described above, step A9709 , it is determined whether the value obtained by subtracting the lowest safety device counter value to date from the current safety device counter value is equal to or greater than the difference ball reference value of 95,000, and if it is the difference ball reference value of 95,000 or more, step A9
710, the difference number of balls may be set to 95,000. Then, in step A9712, the number of difference balls from 0 to 89999, the number of difference balls from 90000 to 94999, and 9500
Corresponding to each number of balls with a difference of 0, the operation information number indicates the non-operation state of the safety device (normal state)
may be set to "0" indicating the operation warning state, "1" indicating the operation warning state, and "2" indicating the operation warning state. In addition, the above-mentioned lowest safety device counter value is stored in the lowest value area of the out-of-area work area, and whenever the current safety device counter value becomes smaller than the stored lowest safety device counter value, the minimum safety device counter value is The device counter value may be updated to the current safety device counter value. In addition, when the operation information number becomes "2", as will be described later, the game will be stopped immediately or after the jackpot or small win ends. In this way, if the number of differential balls related to condition (1) is set to the number of differential balls with the lowest value as a reference, if the current number of differential balls is equal to or greater than the differential ball reference value of 95,000, a game stop state can occur. Therefore, the difference in the number of balls related to condition (1) is equivalent to the maximum increase range (so-called MY) of the difference in the number of balls in one day's business.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 loads the current safety device operation information from the safety device operation information area included in the outside work area and saves it in the old operation information area (A9713).
Then, the old operation information is 2 and the operation information number is 1 (old operation information = 2 and operation information number = 1)
) (A9714). If the old operation information = 2 and the operation information number = 1 (the result of A9714 is "Y"), the safety device operation information is "2" (loaded value) without saving the operation information number in the safety device operation information area. is maintained, and the difference ball confirmation process is ended. This prevents the safety device activation information from changing from "2" to "1" (2→
prevention of changes in 1). Then, in the difference ball confirmation process after the next timer interrupt, the old operation information is 2.
Therefore, the process ends immediately (the result of A9702 is "Y"), the safety device counter value and the safety device operation information are not updated, and the safety device operation information "2" is maintained.

On the other hand, if the old operation information is not 2 or the operation information number is not 1 (the result of A9714 is "N": old operation information≠2 or operation information number≠1), the game control device 100 controls the operation information. Save the number in the safety device operation information area and update the safety device operation information area (A9
715). Thereafter, the difference ball confirmation process is ended. Even if "2" indicating the activation warning state is saved in the safety device activation information area, if there is neither a jackpot nor a small hit, "2" indicating the activation state of the safety device will be saved instantly in the safety device activation monitoring process later. 3" is saved in the safety device activation information area, and no activation warning condition occurs.

In this way, in the difference ball confirmation process, the safety device counter value of 0 to 189999, 1
Corresponding to each of the safety device counter values of 90,000 to 194,999 and the safety device counter value of 195,000, the safety device operation information is "", which indicates the non-operation state (normal state) of the safety device.
"0" (safety device non-operation information), "1" (safety device operation advance notice information) indicating an operation warning state, and "2" (safety device operation warning information) indicating an operation warning state.

From the old safety device operation information (old operation information of A9713) to the updated new information (A971
5) Change patterns (including maintenance patterns) are 0→0, 0→1, 1→0, 1→1, 1→
2, 2 → 2, and as mentioned above, the change from 2 → 1 is prevented (A971
4).

In addition, the game control device 100 produces a difference ball command indicating the updated safety device counter value (A9711) or a difference ball command indicating the updated number of difference balls (=safety device counter value - 100,000). It is sent to the control device 300 (sub board), and the production control device 300 sends it to the display device 4.
The safety device counter value or the difference number of balls may be displayed for the first prize. In that case, in the difference ball confirmation process, even if the old operation information in the old operation information area is 2 (safety device activation warning information) (A9702)
, updates the safety device counter value, and performs steps A9709 and A971.
0 processing is omitted so that the safety device counter value is not limited to the upper limit value 19500.
However, in response to a safety device counter value of 195,000 or more, the safety device activation information is set to “2” (safety device activation warning information) indicating an activation warning state.

The difference ball confirmation process has been explained above, and step A9706 of the difference ball confirmation process is the number of paid out game media (the number of game media that has been decided to be paid out) (the number of game media that has been awarded) or the amount of gaming value determined to be awarded).
It constitutes a counting means. Steps A9703 to A9705 of the difference ball confirmation process constitute a second counting means capable of counting the number of used game media (for example, the number of fired balls or the number of ejected balls). Step A9708 of the difference ball confirmation process constitutes a calculation means capable of calculating a calculation value (for example, a safety device counter value or a difference number of balls) based on the number of payouts and the number of used balls.

[Safety device operation monitoring processing]
Next, details of the safety device operation monitoring process (A9507) in the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 53) will be explained. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of safety device operation monitoring processing. The safety device operation monitoring process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned out-of-area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device operation information is 2 or more (safety device operation information≧2) (A9801). When the safety device activation information is 2 or more (A98
01 result is "Y"), that is, safety device activation warning information (value 2) or safety device activation information (
If value 3) is set, determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit (A98
02). Here, whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit can be determined based on the special figure game processing number, for example. The special figure game processing number is stored in the special figure game processing number area of the intra-area work area.

For example, if the game processing number is from the jackpot fanfare special game processing number to the jackpot ending game processing number, it can be determined that the jackpot has been won. In this embodiment, the special figure game processing number is 7 to 1.
If it is 0, it can be determined that it is a jackpot. Further, for example, if the game processing number of the small winning fanfare is the game processing number of the small winning ending, it can be determined that the small winning is in progress. In this embodiment, if the special figure game processing number is 3 to 6, it can be determined that the small hit is in progress. Note that it may be determined that a small hit is occurring from the time when a small winning symbol is derived or from the time when a small winning fanfare ends, or it may be determined that a jackpot is occurring from the time that a jackpot symbol is derived or from the time that a jackpot fanfare ends. In the case where a jackpot occurs due to a V win during a small win, it may be determined that the jackpot is occurring from the time when the V win occurs.

The gaming control device 100 determines whether the result of A9802 is “
N''), the current safety device operation information is loaded from the safety device operation information area included in the outside work area and saved in the old operation information area (A9803). Then, the safety device operation information (value 3) is saved in the safety device operation information area and the safety device operation information area is updated (A
9804).

On the other hand, if the safety device activation information is "0" or "1" which is smaller than 2 (the result of A9801 is "N"), or if the result of A9802 is "Y" when the jackpot or small hit is in progress. )
, the safety device operation monitoring process is immediately ended, and virtually nothing is done in the safety device operation monitoring process.

As described above, in the activation warning state where the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set and the safety device is activated (condition (1) is met and condition (2) is not satisfied), a jackpot or When the small hit ends and there is no longer a small hit or jackpot (if condition (2) is met), the safety device activation information is set to the safety device activation information (value 3) (safety device activation information 2 → 3). change) (A9804). As a result, the safety device activation flag is set to "1" (safety device related processing A9410), and the safety device is activated (discontinued state).
That is, it is possible to generate a game stop state (game disabled state, game prohibited state) in which special figure variable display games, regular figure variable display games, round games, etc. cannot be executed as games. In this way, the safety device operation flag can be set based on the safety device operation information in the safety device operation information area (part of the outside work area). The safety device operating flag of "1" indicates that the safety device has been activated (is in operation) based on the establishment of the activation condition (predetermined condition).
This indicates the occurrence of a game-disabled state. In addition, based on the safety device operating flag of "1", the results of steps A1309, A1603, A1612, A2201, etc. become "Y", and a game stop state occurs.

By activating the safety device and disabling the game, it is possible to take appropriate countermeasures against fraud when the number of differential balls or the number of safe balls is large, and by suppressing the number of differential balls or the number of safe balls, It may also be possible to suppress people's addiction to gaming.

In addition, even if the safety device counter value of 195000 is reached and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set (A9712, A9715 of the difference ball confirmation process), if there is neither a jackpot nor a small hit (result of A9802) is "N"), the safety device activation information will instantly switch from the safety device activation warning information (value 2) to the safety device activation information (value 3) (A9804)
. That is, in this case, before the activation warning command is sent to the production control device 300, the safety device activation warning information (value 2) in the safety device activation information area is overwritten with the safety device activation information (value 3). It will be deleted. Therefore, when the safety device counter value reaches 195000 when there is neither a jackpot nor a small hit, an activation warning state that warns the activation of the safety device will not occur.
Immediately after, the safety device is activated and a game stop state (game disabled state, game prohibited state) occurs.
Note that this corresponds to the safety device activation information changing instantaneously from 1 to 2 to 3 as described above (2 is an instantaneous value and no activation warning condition occurs), but it also provides advance notice of the safety device activation. In response to the transition from the activation notice state to the activation state in which the safety device is in operation, an in-operation command is sent to the production control device 300 as a safety device activation-related command (A9405, A9
407).

In addition, if the safety device activation warning information (value 3) is set and the safety device has already activated and the game is stopped, the out-of-area integration process will not be executed (the result of A1319 will be “Y”). ”), the safety device activation information is maintained at the safety device activation information (value 3), and the game halt state is continued.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the safety device counter value of 195000 is reached and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set either before or after the V winning during the small winning, after the jackpot due to the V winning ends. In step A9804, the safety device operating information (value 3) is set to stop the game (a jackpot will occur). However, as another example, if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set before the V-win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) is set immediately after the small win ends and the game is stopped. state (no jackpot occurs), and V during the small hit.
If the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set after winning a prize, the safety device activation information (value 3) may be set after the jackpot due to the V winning ends to stop the game (the jackpot will occur).
As another example, even if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set either before or after the V-win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) is set immediately after the small win ends. You can set it to stop playing (no jackpots will occur).

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (processing) that the production control device 300 executes using the production control program will be described.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, details of the main processing executed by the production control device 300 will be explained. Figure 58
is a flowchart showing the procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the production control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (performance microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the production control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B*****".

When execution of the main process is started, the production control device 300 first prohibits interruptions (
B0001). Next, execute the initial settings of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 (B0002, B
0003), and enable interrupts (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the gaming control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 becomes executable.

Next, the production control device 300 allows generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 etc. (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the production control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0
008). The WDT is started with the CPU initialization (B0002) described above, and the CPU 311
monitor whether it is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period has elapsed, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the production control device 300 executes an RTC reading process to read time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338 (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined period (for example, every two hours), and there is no need to read the time information each time the process moves to step B0009. It may be configured such that the RTC reading process is executed only once when the production control device 300 is powered on (that is, the gaming machine 10 is powered on) (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, steps B0003 and B0004). ). The production control device 300 sets a timer (timekeeping means) for measuring time in a timer area in the RAM,
RT only once when reading time information from RTC338 at a predetermined cycle or when power is turned on.
When reading the time information from the C338, the timer (clocking means) may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC338. The production control device 300 may execute various processes using a timer. In this way, the number of times the time is read from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the performance control device 300 detects an operation signal of the performance button 25 by the player (a signal from the performance button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), and changes the performance content (setting) according to the detected signal. Performance button input processing is executed (B0010). continue,
Execute the hall/player setting mode process that accepts operations such as changing the brightness and volume of LEDs and liquid crystals (display device 41, etc.) by the person in charge of the game hall (gaming parlor), players, etc. (B0011
). For operation, cross key switch 450, volume adjustment button switches 451a, 45
1b, the performance button 25, and the volume control switch 335 on the back of the gaming machine. In the hole/player setting mode process, the player can customize the performance according to the performance points described later.

Next, the production control device 300 executes production point control processing for adding and clearing production points (B0012). In the performance point control process, performance points are added when a performance or operation for which performance points are added is executed, and the performance points are added at the end of a game or when the game is stopped so that the performance points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on performance points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code. For example, the production control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in hall/player setting mode processing or safety device processing (when receiving an active command).

Next, the production control device 300 executes a random number update process to update random numbers such as production random numbers (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the gaming control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). Note that details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a customer waiting demo editing process for editing and controlling the contents of the customer waiting demo displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and changes the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 while waiting for a customer. The power saving control process to be controlled is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data according to the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer, etc. The effect display editing process is executed (B0017). If the drawing data set at this time allows the VDP 312 to complete drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec), the image on the display device 41 can be updated without any problem. Then, preparation for drawing to the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation completion setting is executed (B0018).

Subsequently, the production control device 300 determines whether it is frame switching timing (B
0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "N"), the process of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "Y"), the process to the display device 41 is repeated. Instruct screen drawing (B0
020). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, if periodic V blanking (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame period), frames are switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60 seconds, but the interval may be further increased.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 executes a sound control process to control the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process that controls decoration devices (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process that controls performance devices (board performance device 44, frame performance device, etc.) such as movable performance objects (electric performance objects) driven by motors and solenoids (B0023 ). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory motion effect that drives a motor is set.

Then, after completing the process of B0023 described above, the production control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. Thereafter, the processes from B0008 to B0023 are repeated.

[Received command check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 58) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of commands received in order to check the number of commands received from the gaming control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of commands received is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the gaming control device 100 (result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, if the number of received commands is not 0, that is, if a command is being received from the gaming control device 100 (result of B1102 is "Y"), the production control device 300 registers the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of commands received (B1103
), copies the contents of the receive command buffer in RAM to the command area for analysis (B11
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Furthermore, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds by 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The receive command buffer stores 32 received commands.
It is structured so that you can save up to 100 pieces. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the received commands are read out in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the reception command buffer corresponding to the read command reading index is cleared.

The production control device 300 determines whether copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 has been completed (B1106), and if the copying has not been completed (the result of B1106 is "N"). ”), the processes from steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the production control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the received command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. The received command buffer can store 32 commands, but the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area in the received command buffer without directly analyzing it, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands.

Subsequently, the production control device 300 determines that when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y”).
''), loads the received command content in the command area for analysis (B1107), and executes received command analysis processing to analyze the content (B1108). Note that details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 60 below. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of commands loaded in the process of step B1101 has been completed (B1110), and if the analysis has not been completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the step The processes from B1107 to B1110 are repeated. If the analysis is completed (result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process ends.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 59) will be described. FIG. 60 shows the production control device 30
2 is a flowchart showing the procedure of received command analysis processing executed by the computer.

The production control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). The commands sent from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 include the MODE section (MODE command) and the A
The command consists of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted successively from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower orders of the received command are M
The ODE section and the ACTION section are configured in this order.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE section is within the normal range (B12
02). That is, it is determined whether the MODE section indicating the type of command has a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE section is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION section is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether the ACTION part indicating the content of the command (specific production instructions, etc.) has a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
The result is "Y"), and it is further determined whether the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (result of B1204 is "Y"), command processing according to the command system is executed in processing from B1205 onwards.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the value of the MODE section is within the range of the variable command (B1205). Incidentally, the variable command is a command that instructs a variable pattern of a special decorative symbol, and includes, for example, a variable command. If the MODE part represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), variable command processing is executed (B1206
), the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE section does not represent a variable command, the production control device 300 (B12
05 result is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the hit type command (B
1207). In addition, winning commands are commands that command operations related to production during jackpots and small wins (displaying fanfare screens and round screens, etc.).For example, fanfare commands to command fanfare screens, round screens, etc. round command to command etc., interval command to command interval screen etc.
This is an ending command for instructing an ending screen, etc. And M.O.D.
If the E part represents a winning command (result of B1207 is "Y"), winning command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a winning command, the production control device 300 (B12
07 result is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the symbol-related command (B
1209). Note that the symbol-related commands include, for example, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to a stop symbol pattern. If the MODE section represents a symbol-related command (result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol-related command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a symbol-related command, the production control device 300 (B12
09 result is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B
1211). If the MODE section represents a single-shot command (result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a single-shot command, the production control device 300 executes (B12
11 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (B1213). The prefetch symbol type command includes, for example, a prefetch stop symbol command. If the MODE part represents a prefetch symbol type command (the result of B1213 is “Y
”), executes prefetch symbol-related command processing (B1214), and ends the received command analysis processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a prefetch symbol-related command, the production control device 300 (
The result of B1213 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section is within the range of the prefetch variable command (B1215). The lookahead variation command includes, for example, a lookahead variation pattern command. If the MODE section represents a prefetch variable command (result of B1215 is "Y"), prefetch variable command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process ends.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a prefetch variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the production control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or if the AC to the MODE part is
Even if the combination of TION parts is not correct (the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process ends.

[Single command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 60) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of one-shot command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section represents a model specification command (result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing is executed to set the type of gaming machine (B
1302), the one-shot command processing ends. For example, a model specification command includes a model code.

If the MODE section does not represent a model specification command, the production control device 300 (B1
301 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). If the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command, then (
The result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization, etc. is executed (B1304), and the one-shot command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command ( B1305). For example, power failure recovery commands include a power failure recovery command and a recovery screen command. If the MODE part represents a power failure recovery command (B13
05 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the one-shot command process is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a power failure recovery command, the production control device 300 executes (B
1305 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section represents a customer waiting demonstration command (B1307). If the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B13
07 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot command process is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a customer waiting demo command, the production control device 300 executes (B
1307 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (B1309). Then, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310),
Terminates one-shot command processing.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command. (B1311). Then, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (result of B1311 is "Y"), special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B131
2) End the one-shot command processing.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents a probability information command (B1
313 is "Y"), probability information setting processing is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a probability information command, the production control device 300 (B1
313 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section represents an error/invalid command (B1315). In addition, examples of error/illegal commands include the unauthorized occurrence command, unauthorized release command, status off command, status on command, magnet unauthorized notification command (magnetic error command), and panel radio unauthorized notification command (panel radio error command). be.
The fraud occurrence command includes a command indicating the occurrence of a fraudulent prize based on the signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 43. The unauthorized release command is a command that indicates unauthorized release. In the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (A1308), the occurrence of fraudulent winnings and the cancellation of fraudulent winnings are monitored, and a fraud occurrence command and a fraudulent cancellation command can be transmitted. Status-on commands include generation of a shot ball out switch signal (shot ball out error), generation of an overflow switch signal (overflow error), generation of a dispensing abnormality status signal (dispensing abnormality error), and the glass frame open detection switch 63. There are commands that indicate the generation of a signal from (glass frame open error) and the generation of a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) (main body frame open error, front frame open error). Further, the status off command indicates that no error has occurred. When there is a detection (magnet fraud) from the magnetic sensor switch 61, the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1
314), a magnet fraud notification command is transmitted. When there is a detection (radio wave fraud) from the radio wave sensor 62, a board radio wave fraud notification command is transmitted in the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1315).

If the MODE part represents an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing is executed to notify or cancel notification of error or fraud (
B1316), the one-shot command processing ends. In the error/fraud setting process, for example, an error or fraud notification sound is generated, an LED for effect provided in the gaming machine 10 such as an LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46 is made to emit light in a predetermined manner, The display device 41 or the like is set to display an error.

If the MODE part does not represent an error/invalid command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents a command for switching production modes. Determine (B1317). Then, if the MODE section represents a command for switching the production mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the production mode switching setting process is executed (B1
318), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE section does not represent a command for switching the production mode (result of B1317 is "N"), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE section indicates an out pitch number command indicating the number of out pitches. It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, when the MODE part represents the out pitch count command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out pitch count reception process is executed (B1
320), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE section does not represent the number of out pitches command, the production control device 300 executes (B
1319 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE section represents a count command (such as a big winning opening count command) (B1321). Then, when the MODE section represents a command for counting the big prize opening switch (result of B1321 is "Y"), count information setting processing is executed (B1322), and the single-shot command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a count command, the production control device 300 (B
1321), it is determined whether the MODE section represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The setting value information command is executed in step A of FIG. 5B.
It is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1049 and the command at the time of RAM initialization sent in the process of step A1047. When the MODE part represents a setting value information command, (
The result of B1323 is "Y"), the setting value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command processing is ended. In the setting value reception process, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting value information command, the production control device 300 executes (B
1323), it is determined whether the MODE section represents a setting change command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, the command (A
1033). If the MODE part represents a setting change command (B13
25 is "Y"), the setting change type information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot type command process is ended. In the setting change information setting process, the contents of the setting change command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change information setting process, a setting changing indication is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command, the production control device 300 (
If the result of B1325 is "N"), it is determined whether the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (B1327). As a setting confirmation command, for example, the command while confirming probability settings (
A1036). If the MODE part represents a setting confirmation command (B1
327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation type information setting process is executed (B1328), and the one-shot type command process is ended. In the setting confirmation information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command to confirm probability settings is received, in the setting confirmation information setting process, a setting confirmation display is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that settings are being confirmed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting confirmation command, the production control device 300 (
If the result of B1327 is "N"), it is determined whether the MODE section represents a safety device-related command (B1329). An example of a safety device related command is a safety device activation related command (A9407). When a difference ball command including difference ball information such as a safety device counter value and the number of difference balls is sent from the gaming control device 100 to the production control device 300, this difference ball command is included in the safety device related commands. good. If the MODE section represents a safety device-related command (result of B1329 is "Y"), safety device-related processing related to the safety device is executed (B1330), and the single-shot command processing is ended. In safety equipment processing,
It stores the contents of safety device-related commands and executes the processing corresponding to the commands.

In the safety device-related processing, information included in the safety device-related command can be displayed on the display device 41 as processing corresponding to the command. For example, when a safety device activation related command is received as a safety device related command, the safety device activation information (safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information, safety device activation warning information (value 1), safety device activation information included in the ACTION part of the safety device activation related command). Safety device-related display (operation notice display 511) corresponding to information (value 2), safety device activation information (value 3))
, an operation warning display 512, and an operation-in-progress display 513) are displayed on the display device 41. Also, for example,
When a difference ball command is received as a safety device related command, the display device 41 displays the number of difference balls.
to be displayed.

To display the number of difference balls (= safety device counter value - 100,000), the entire range of values (for example, 0 to 100,000 or -100,000 to +100,000) is displayed on the display device 41 in response to the received difference ball command. It may be displayed, or only values within a predetermined range (for example, 90,000 to 100,000 after the operation notice state) may be displayed. If the difference number of balls is displayed only within this predetermined range, it will be displayed only when the difference number of balls is important and attract players' attention, and when the difference number of balls is not important, the difference number of balls will be displayed. The display device 41 can be made more visible by being hidden. The predetermined ranges include a range corresponding to the operation notice state (90,000 or more and less than 95,000), a range corresponding to the operation warning state and the operation state (95,000 or more), an operation notice state, the operation warning state, and the operation. Range corresponding to all states (9
89,000 or more, 91,000 or more), or more than the value immediately before or after entering the operation notice state (for example, 89,000 or more, 91,000 or more). Also, the number of difference balls itself may be displayed, or the number of difference balls may be displayed indirectly in the form of the number of game balls (number of game media) remaining until the safety device is activated (stopping). Good too. Furthermore, instead of the difference in the number of balls, a safety device counter value may be displayed, and when the safety device counter value is within a predetermined range (for example, 190,000 or more after the activation warning state), the value is displayed on the display device 41. It is also possible to do so.

Note that the difference ball command may be notified (transmitted and received) in correspondence with the number of difference balls that changes in units of 1. For example, the number of difference balls indicated by the difference ball command is between 0 and 100,000 or between -100,000 and +100,000, and can be changed by one in the same way as the actual number of difference balls. A difference ball command may be transmitted every time the safety device counter value and thus the number of difference balls is updated (A9711).

Further, the difference ball command may be notified (transmitted and received) in accordance with the number of difference balls that changes in a predetermined unit. For example, the number of difference balls indicated by the difference ball command can be changed in units of 1000, and is 0 (=
Actual number of difference balls 0-999), 1000 (=actual number of difference balls 1000-1999), 2000
(=actual number of difference balls 2000 to 2999), ..., 100,000 (=actual number of difference balls 100,000). In this case, in order to reduce the chances of transmitting the difference ball command, the difference ball command may be transmitted every time the safety device counter value and thus the number of difference balls is updated in units of 1000 (A9711). Further, the number of difference balls indicated by the difference ball command may have a value on the negative side.

If the MODE section does not represent a safety device-related command (the result of B1329 is "N"), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a command to stop the symbol (B1331). . The symbol stop commands include, for example, a special pattern 1 pattern stop command (decoration special pattern 1 stop command) and a special pattern 2 pattern stop command (decoration special pattern 2 stop command). If the MODE part represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1331 is “Y
”), the production control device 300 next determines whether the command of the MODE section is a normal command (B1332).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (result of B1332 is "Y")
, the production control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special symbol (B1333), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols have stopped (B1334), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the process of B1334, as an example, the gaming status flag is set to the normal status, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the gaming status flag may be set to ``Fluctuating'', ``Making a jackpot'', or ``Making a small hit''. is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE part does not represent a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1331 is "N
), or the command in the MODE section is not normal (result of B1332 is "N")
, the production control device 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

In addition, the production control device 300 may execute processing for commands not shown in FIG. 61 in single-shot command processing. For example, the performance control device 300 receives from the game control device 100 a time reduction variation number command, a performance rotation speed command, a hitting method instruction notification command (left-handed hitting instruction notification command, right-handed hitting instruction notification command), a specific area passing command, etc. Then, the process corresponding to the command may be performed. The production control device 300 can obtain the remaining number of variations in the time-saving state from a time-reduction variation number command (time-reduction variation number), and can obtain the remaining number of production rotations in each production mode from the production rotation number command, etc. Performances can be set based on the remaining number of fluctuations in the game, the number of rotations remaining in each performance mode, etc. The performance control device 300 displays a hitting method instruction display (left-handed hitting instruction display or right-handed hitting instruction display) that instructs (suggests) how to play in response to a hitting method instruction notification command (left-handed hitting instruction notification command or right-handed hitting instruction notification command). ) can be displayed (notified) on the display device 41 or the like. The production control device 300 can notify (display) the V winning prize on the display device 41 or the like in response to the specific area passing command.

[Ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, details of the prefetch symbol-related command processing (B1214) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 60) will be described. FIG. 62 shows the production control device 30
It is a flowchart showing the procedure of prefetch symbol type command processing executed by 0.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest pending information is information on special figure 1 pending (special figure 1 starting memory), for example, if the latest received decoration special figure pending number command is the number of decorative special figure 1 pending. It is determined whether it is a command (B1601). If the latest pending information is the information of special figure 1 pending (result of B1601 is "Y"), send the pre-read symbol type command (pre-read stop symbol command) to the special figure 1 pre-read symbol command area corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols 1. Save (B1602).

If the latest reservation information is not the information of special figure 1 reservation (result of B1601 is "N"), the production control device 300, in other words, the latest received decoration special figure reservation number command is the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command. In this case, the pre-read symbol command (pre-read stop symbol command) is saved in the special pattern 2 pre-read pattern command area corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings 2 (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the production control device 300 sets a prefetch variable command reception wait flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a prefetch variable command (B160
4). This is because the pre-read symbol type command and the pre-read variable type command are set, so the pre-read variable type command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-read symbol type command. Thereafter, the prefetch symbol-related command processing ends.

[Ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, details of the prefetch variable command processing (B1216) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 60) will be described. FIG. 63 shows the production control device 30
3 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of prefetch variable command processing executed by 0.

The production control device 300 first issues a prefetch variation command (prefetch variation pattern command).
It is determined whether or not it is waiting for reception of (B1701). If the above-mentioned read-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the read-ahead variable command processing is ended. If the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "Y"), the read-ahead variable command reception wait flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the production control device 300 (sub board) displays the latest pending information pattern (special figure 1 or special figure 2)
A look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reservations is set (B1703), and a sub-internal look-ahead variation command MODE section is obtained corresponding to the MODE section of the look-ahead variation command (B1703).
B1704). Next, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and a look-ahead variation command ACT in the sub that corresponds to the ACTION part (ACT part) of the look-ahead variation command is set.
(B1706).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether both the converted MODE section and ACT section (i.e., the intra-sub look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707).
. Note that if it is a normal (valid) command, it will be converted to a value other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
If both CT parts are other than 0 (result of B1707 is "Y"), MODE part and A after conversion
The converted command configured from the CT section is saved in the look-ahead variable command area (special figure 1 look-ahead change command area or special figure 2 look-ahead change command area) corresponding to the latest pending information and the number of holds (B1708). Then, execute read-ahead command consistency check processing (B170
9), Determine whether the combination of MODE section and ACT section after conversion is normal (B1710
).

Note that the first half fluctuation time corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of suspensions when the suspension variable display game is started. When the pending variable display game starts, if there are no other pending events, the first half of the variation will be longer, and if a new pending event occurs and the number of pending events is large, the first half of the variation will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE part of the received prefetch variation command is converted into the sub-prefetch variation command MODE part so that the internal commands of the production control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second half fluctuation corresponding to the intra-sub pre-read fluctuation command ACT part does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there are different types of leeches of the same strain,
If the ACT part (second half variation value) of the look-ahead variation command is not converted, the production control device 30
If 0 is used as is, there will be too many numbers and it will be difficult to check. For example, in normal reach,
There are different types, such as normal reach - 1 stop off and normal reach + 1 stop off.
Therefore, by converting the ACT portions indicating the reach of the same system into the same intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT portions, the number can be reduced and the burden of check processing such as prefetch command consistency check processing can be reduced.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the intra-sub intra-prefetch variation command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or , If the combination of MODE section and ACT section after conversion is not normal (B171
If the result of 0 is "N"), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the command after conversion, and the prefetch variable command processing is terminated.

If the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal (B
1710 is "Y"), the pending information to be read ahead (information on the latest pending) is loaded from the read ahead variation command area (B1711), and the read ahead lottery process regarding the look ahead performance of the latest pending is executed (B1712). Examples of the look-ahead performance (look-ahead preview performance) include a continuous preview performance (including a chance look-ahead performance), a look-ahead zone performance, a pending change notice, and the like. Next, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead effect of the latest reservation (reservation change notice, etc.) will occur (B1713
). When the latest pending look-ahead effect occurs (result of B1713 is "Y"), point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether the prefetched performance (pending change notice, etc.) that occurs is a performance that will start immediately (B1715). If the prefetch effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), a display corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is set (B1716). If the prefetch effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (B1715
(result is "N"), set and save display corresponding to pre-reading effect (i.e. pre-reading effect that does not start immediately), such as during hold shift (when moving the hold display, when the number of holds is reduced) (B171
7). Then, the prefetch variable command processing ends. In addition, the look-ahead performance is a performance that informs the expectation of a jackpot (the expectation of a special result) by foretelling information suggesting the result (gaming result) of the variable display game before the variable display game stops. However, information indicating the set probability setting value (1 to 6) may be broadcast. In other words, the production control device 3
00 can perform a pre-reading effect such that the pending display (icon) of the pre-reading target is changed based on the jackpot expectation level and probability setting value.

On the other hand, if the latest pending prefetch effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), the effect control device 300 immediately ends the prefetch variable command process.

[Design-related command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, details of the symbol-related command processing (B1210) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 60) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of symbol-related command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received symbol-related command (decoration special figure command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, a symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE section and ACTION section (ACT section) of the symbol-related command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between special symbols 1 and 2, symbol types are set using a table for each MODE.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the symbol types are symbol type 1 (3R normal jackpot C jackpot symbol and 3R normal small hit A small hit symbol), symbol type 2 (3R normal jackpot A, 3R normal jackpot A, 3R normal jackpot A, 3R normal jackpot A,
R normal jackpot B, 10R normal jackpot B jackpot symbol, 10R normal small hit B small hit symbol, symbol type 3 (10R regular small hit A small hit symbol), symbol type 4 (10R regular jackpot A and 10R There are usually jackpot symbols such as jackpot C).

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 60) will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of variable command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 determines the special figure type (special figure 1) of the received variable system command (variable command).
Or, it is determined whether the special figure 2) is unconfirmed (B1901). When the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is ended. If the special symbol type is not determined (B1901 result is "N"), check the combination of the received variable type command and symbol type command (B1902), and check whether the variable type command and symbol type are inconsistent. is determined (B1903). Here, inconsistency means that there is a contradiction in performance, such as when a symbol-related command of a jackpot symbol is received even though a variable-related command of a loss is received. When the variable type command and symbol type are inconsistent (B1903 result is "Y")
, ends variable command processing.

If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the production control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1
904), execute a variable effect setting process to set a variable effect that is a variable effect (B19)
05). Next, set the special figure fluctuating to the game status flag indicating the game status (P machine status) (B
1906), if the number of pre-read performances such as continuous performances is not 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described variable command process (FIG. 65) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable performance setting process executed by the performance control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the variation pattern type is a non-reach variation (a variation that does not result in a ready-to-reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is non-reach variation (result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the special figure type, production mode, setting information (setting value) (B2002), and correspond to the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type. Obtain the address of the first half notice distribution group table (B2003
). In the case of non-reach fluctuations, the larger the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is obtained.

If the variation pattern type is not a variation without reach (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if it is a variation with reach, the production control device 300 controls the number of production points, model code, special symbol type, production mode, Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting information (setting value) (B2004), and set the M of the variable command (variable command).
The address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ODE part and the variation pattern type is acquired (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the production control device 300 performs a lottery for previews that appear during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Next, set the second half preview distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special symbol type, production mode, symbol type, and setting information (setting value) (B2007), and execute the variable command ACT. The address of the second-half preview distribution group table corresponding to the division is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for previews appearing during the second-half fluctuation (reach) is performed (B2009). Thereafter, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE part and ACT part of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010).
In addition, you can see the fluctuation time and main reach contents from the fluctuation command.

Next, the performance control device 300 determines the content of the performance (preview performance) corresponding to the lottery result of the preview (B2011). Thereafter, the stop symbols of the decorative special symbol variable display game are determined in accordance with the contents of variable effects such as reach effects and preview effects (B2012). Here, the decorative stop symbols are specifically determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of a missed symbol.

Next, the performance control device 300 performs display settings for a variable performance (B2013), and performs display settings for a preview performance (B2014). Next, set the display setting for the reservation reduction corresponding to the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2), for example, display the decrease in the reserve display corresponding to the ornamental special figure 1 or ornamental special figure 2 that changes this time. Shift display) is set (B2015). Next, an audio number that determines the presentation mode (sound output mode) by the speaker's voice and a decoration number that determines the presentation mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). Decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18
) has a plurality of decorative light emitting parts (decorative LEDs, etc.) and emits light in a light emitting manner (color, light emitting timing, etc. of each LED) determined by the decorative number.

Note that it is also possible to set the voice number and decoration number based not only on the content of the performance but also on setting information (setting values). In this way, the player can enjoy inferring the setting information (setting value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decorative device, that is, the light emission mode of the decorative light emitting section (LED).

Next, the production control device 300 performs display settings for decorative special figure fluctuations corresponding to the special figure type (B
2017), display settings are made for a fourth symbol variation regarding a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that vary on the display device 41 (B2018). In addition,
The fourth symbol variation is the lamp display section 1 of the above-mentioned lamp display device 80 provided other than the display device 41.
, 2 (LED), or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41.

[Hit command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, details of the hit command processing (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 60) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of winning command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the MODE part of the received winning command represents a fanfare (B2101). If the MODE part of the winning command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is a fanfare command for a jackpot or a small win, a fanfare effect setting process is performed to set the fanfare effect. Execute (B2102). Further, in response to a fanfare command for a jackpot or a small win, a hitting instruction (left hitting instruction or right hitting instruction) may be displayed (notified) on the display device 41 or the like. Note that the fanfare command may include information about the upper limit of the number of rounds for the current jackpot. Subsequently, the game status flag indicating the current gaming status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 is set to fanfare in progress (B2103), and the winning command processing is ended. In addition, the upper limit value of the number of rounds, which corresponds to the number of rounds of the final round, can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol-related command (decoration special command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern). In some cases.

If the MODE part of the received winning command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the winning command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE part represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, when the winning command is a round command or a small winning opening command, the production control device 300 sets the round production for setting the round production. The setting process is executed, and the game status flag indicating the current gaming status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 is set to in-round (B2105, B2106), and the winning command process is ended.

If the MODE part of the received winning command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the winning command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B2107
If the result is "Y"), that is, the winning command is an interval command, the production control device 300 executes an interval production setting process for setting an interval production,
The game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to "INTERVAL" (B2108, B2109), and the winning command processing is ended.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent an interval (B2107
The result is "N"), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the winning command represents an ending (B2110). When the MODE part represents the ending (B21
10 result is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is a jackpot or small winning ending command, the production control device 300 executes the ending production setting process for setting the ending production, and changes the current game. The game state flag indicating the game state of the machine 10 (P machine state) is set to "ending" (B2111, B2112), and the winning command processing is ended.

In addition, if the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent the ending (B2
110 is "N"), the production control device 300 ends the winning command processing without executing any processing. As mentioned above, a jackpot performance or a small win performance consists of a fanfare performance, a round performance, an interval performance, an ending performance, etc.; Some of the performances may not be present.

[Aspects of performance-related equipment depending on the status of safety equipment, etc.]
FIG. 68 is a table showing aspects of performance-related devices depending on the state of the safety device. As shown in FIG. 68, the mode of the performance device changes depending on the state of the safety device or the safety device counter value (and thus the number of difference balls).

As mentioned above, the safety device counter value from 0 to 189999 (-100000 to 8999
Corresponding to the difference in the number of balls (9), the state of the safety device becomes an inoperative state (an operation notice state, an operation warning state, or a normal state in which there is no operation state). Safety device counter value from 190000 to 194999 (9
0000 to 94999 (different number of balls), the state of the safety device becomes an operation warning state that foretells the operation of the safety device. Corresponding to the safety device counter value of 195,000 (reaching the number of differential balls of 95,000), an activation warning state that warns of activation of the safety device or an activation state (in-operation state) in which the safety device is activated is entered.

In addition, when the safety device counter value is 195,000, the safety device becomes activated when there is a jackpot or a small win, and becomes activated when there is neither a jackpot nor a small win. Therefore, if the safety device is activated before a jackpot or small win occurs, a game stop state (game disabled state, game prohibited state) occurs immediately, and an activation warning state does not occur.

On the other hand, the activation warning state can occur when the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 during a jackpot or a small win. For this reason, when the jackpot or small win ends and it is no longer a jackpot or a small win, the safety device shifts from the activation warning state to the activation state (operating state).

When the safety device counter value of 0 to 194999 (difference in the number of balls from -100000 to 94999) is in the inoperative state or in the activation warning state, the state of the gaming machine (gaming state) is in the state of playing or waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer). condition). Also, the safety device counter value of 195000 (9500
When the number of balls with a difference of 0 is reached), the state of the gaming machine is in the small hit or jackpot state when the safety device is activated, but when the safety device is activated, the game machine is in the stopped state (playing disabled state, game prohibited state). ). Note that even when the strong error 2 occurs, the same game stop state can occur.

In the game stop state, the games include a special figure fluctuation display game, a regular figure fluctuation display game, and
Round games (games during jackpots or small wins) etc. cannot be executed. To do this,
As mentioned above, when the game is stopped, the detection of the game ball by the winning hole switch is disabled and the winning hole (winning) is invalidated ("Y" in A2201), and the big winning hole, specific area 86, and normal fluctuation are disabled. The solenoid is stopped so that the prize winning device 37 etc. is closed ("Y
''), the firing of game balls from the ball firing device is stopped (prohibited) and the firing is stopped ("Y" in A1611 and A1612), and the collective display device 50 is turned off (the results in A1610 and A1612 are "Y"). In the game stop state, not only the special pattern fluctuation display game and the regular pattern fluctuation display game cannot be continued, but also a new special pattern fluctuation display game and a new regular pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started. In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the firing is not stopped in the game stopped state where the safety device is activated (even in the game stopped state that occurs due to the strong error 2, the firing does not have to be stopped). In addition, when the game is stopped, as mentioned above, the payout command sending process (
A1307) is not stopped, and the payout of prize balls due to winnings that occurred before the game stopped state continues.

In the game stop state, a security signal is generated that is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer (A9322), and a test signal is generated that is output to the test firing test device as ON data of the gaming machine error status signal (A9322). A9323). It is also possible to configure a configuration in which the test signal (gaming machine error status signal) is not generated when the game is stopped when the safety device is activated (the test signal is not generated even when the game is stopped due to strong error 2). (optional).

When the safety device is not activated, the display device 41 basically does not display any safety device-related displays related to the safety device, but exceptionally, when waiting for a customer, etc., the display device 41 does not display any safety device-related displays. ”) to indicate that the model is equipped with a safety device. A player who sees the specific model display 541 can recognize that the gaming machine 10 has a safety device (complete function).

In the safety device activation warning state, the display device 41 displays an activation warning display 511 (for example, the words "Soon to be discontinued") as a safety device related display (or safety device activation information display). In order to effectively display the operation notice display 511, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 may change depending on the game state, such as while waiting for a customer or during a variable display (during execution of a special figure variable display game). . Note that at the start of the operation notice state, the production control device 300 has received the operation notice command corresponding to the operation notice state as a safety device operation related command, so the operation notice display 511 can be displayed on the display device 41. (Safety device system processing of B1330).

An operation notice display 511 notifies the player of the possibility that he or she may not be able to play the game, prompts the player to finish the game, and prevents the player from being disadvantaged unintentionally. Moreover, the operation notice display 511 can give surprise to those who are committing fraud and urge them to stop the fraud. The display mode of the operation notice display 511 can be changed to the gaming state (for example, while waiting for a customer,
It is possible to appropriately display a notice by changing the display according to the current situation (during variable display).

In the activation warning state of the safety device during a small hit or jackpot, the display device 41 displays an activation warning display 512 as a safety device related display (for example, the words "The game will stop after the winning ends").
Display. Note that at the start of the operation warning state, the production control device 300 has received the operation warning command corresponding to the operation warning state as a safety device activation related command, so the operation warning display 512 can be displayed on the display device 41. (Safety device system processing of B1330).

In the operating state of the safety device (not during a small hit or jackpot), that is, when the game is stopped, the display device 41 displays an in-operation display 513 (for example, the words "Stopping") as a safety device-related display.
Display. Note that at the start of the operating state, the production control device 300 receives an in-operation command corresponding to the operating state as a safety device operation-related command, so the display device 41
The operating display 513 becomes possible (safety device system processing of B1330).

In addition, the production control device 300 displays an operation notice display 511 that warns of the operation of the safety device, an operation warning display 512 that warns of the operation of the safety device, and an in-operation display 513 that indicates that the safety device is in operation on the display device 41. etc. (display means).

Note that the display device 41 can display an error message even in a game stop state where the safety device is activated. For example, since payout continues even when the game is stopped, a payout error (weak error) regarding the payout of game balls (game media) may occur, but the display device 41 can notify the payout error by displaying an error. It is. Note that even when strong error 2 occurs, the game stops and enters a game stop state (game disabled state, game prohibited state), but in the game stop state due to strong error 2, the display device 41 is In order to make players aware of the occurrence of an error, it may be possible to notify the payout error by displaying an error, or it may be possible to make the payout error not to be notified so as not to confuse it with the strong error 2.

In the game stop state, unlike the non-operation state, the operation notice state, and the operation warning state, all the light emitting parts (LEDs) of the collective display device 50 and the performance display device 152 are turned off (all lights are turned off). In addition,
In the game stop state, all the light emitting parts (LEDs) of the collective display device 50 and the performance display device 152 may be lit (all lights on). In the game stop state, the ball lending button 27 remains valid, and when the player operates it to borrow a game ball, the game ball may be paid out from the payout device onto the upper tray 21.

In the game stop state, the performance control device 300 that has received the active command turns off all the performance LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10, such as the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 (all lights out), or All lights up (all lights on). However, while an error is occurring, some or all of the performance LEDs may be lit in red. Further, in the game stop state, the production control device 300 may stop the audio output from the speaker 19 and make it silent.

In addition, in the game stop state, the performance control device 300 does not execute the hall/player setting mode processing (B0011), and even if there is an operation on the operation section, the performance LED and liquid crystal (display device 41 etc.) The brightness and volume of the speaker 19 may be disabled and set to default brightness and volume. Note that, for example, the default brightness may be zero or a predetermined value (all lights off or all lights on), and the default volume may be zero (silence). In addition, in the hall/player setting mode processing (adjustment processing), the operation parts of the person in charge of the gaming hall and the players (cross key switch 450, volume adjustment button switches 451a, 451b, volume adjustment switch 335 on the back of the gaming machine, etc.) ), it is possible to perform various adjustments such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment of the gaming machine 10. In this way, various adjustments such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment are not performed even if the player etc. performs an operation in the game stopped state, so it becomes easier for the player etc. to recognize that the game is stopped, Also,
If the default brightness and volume are low, power can be saved when the game is stopped.

In another configuration, in the game stop state, even if the performance control device 300 executes the hall/player setting mode process (B0011), the production control device 300 does not accept (ignore) the operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation section. (or disabled), the default brightness and volume may be set even if there is an operation on the operation unit by a person in charge of the gaming hall or a player. In the case of this configuration, the first operation unit (cross key switch 450, volume adjustment button switches 451a, 451b) that can be operated by the player is
), while disabling (ignoring or disabling) the operation signal corresponding to the second operation part (volume control switch 335
) may be accepted. Then, when a player operates the first operation section, the brightness and volume are set to the default brightness, and when a person involved in the hall operates the second operation section, the second operation section is set. The volume adjustment and brightness adjustment of the gaming machine 10 may be performed in response to the operation.
The second operation section (volume adjustment switch 335) is provided on the performance control device 300 on the back of the gaming machine, and can be operated by hall personnel, but cannot be operated by players.

The performance control device 300, when the game stop state starts (when the safety device is activated) while the movable accessory (movable member, electric accessory, movable body, board presentation device 44, frame presentation device) is in operation, If the movable accessory is located at an operating position other than the initial position, the movable accessory may be moved from the operating position back to the initial position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being maintained in the operating position in a game-disabled state in which the game cannot be played, thereby preventing unnecessary misunderstandings such as that the movable member is out of order. While the movable accessory (movable member) is returning from the operating position to the initial position, the performance LED of the movable accessory may be turned on (operating state) or turned off (initial state). It's okay. As mentioned above, when the game is stopped, all of the performance LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 are turned off (all lights out) or are all lit (all lights on).
After the movable accessory returns to its initial position, the performance LED of the movable accessory turns off or lights up in accordance with the other LEDs.

On the contrary, the production control device 300 controls movable accessories (movable members, electric accessories, movable bodies, board production device 4
4. If the game stop state starts (when the safety device is activated) while the frame production device is operating, and the movable accessory is located at an operating position other than the initial position, the movable accessory is moved to the operating position. It may be maintained at the operating position without returning to the initial position. In this case, the operating position at which the movable accessory stops and is maintained is the operating position at the start of the game stop state, a different operating position where the movable accessory has moved slightly from the start of the game stop state due to a time lag, or , or another appropriate operating position different from the operating position at the start of the game stop state. As mentioned above, when the game is stopped, the performance LEDs provided on the gaming machine 10 are all turned off (all lights out) or all lit (all lights on), so the movable accessory is located in the operating position. While the movable accessory remains stationary, the performance LED of the movable accessory may be turned off or turned on in accordance with the other LEDs.

In this way, if the movable accessory does not return to the initial position after the start of the game stop state (after activation of the safety device) and remains at the predetermined operating position, it will be unnatural and the gaming machine 10 will return to the normal state (game It is possible to emphasize to the player that the player is not in a state in which he or she can play or play. For example, if the board presentation device 44 (such as the upper presentation unit 40c) as a movable accessory remains in an unnatural position, such as in front of the display screen of the display device 41, and the game is stopped, the player feels uncomfortable. Remember, game machine 1
It becomes easier to recognize that 0 is not a normal state.

A board presentation device 44 in which movable accessories are provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40)
In this case, the initial position of the movable accessory is, for example, when the movable accessory is on the front side (front) of the display device 41.
The operating position of the movable accessory is, for example, a position where the movable accessory overlaps the display device 41 on the front side of the display device 41 (as shown in the upper production unit 40c in FIG. 103 (h3)). (see location). In addition, the initial position in this case is a storage space on the back side (rear side) of the center case 40, where the movable accessory is difficult to see from the front side (player side) (center case 40).
It may be a position where a part of the movable accessory is covered by the movable accessory. In addition, the movable accessory is a glass frame 1
5 (or the opening/closing frame), the initial position of the movable accessory is, for example, the storage space inside the glass frame 15 (or the opening/closing frame). This is a position where the movable accessory is difficult to see from the front side (a position where it is retracted into the glass frame 15 and a part of the movable accessory is covered by the glass frame 15), and the operating position of the movable accessory is, for example, This is a position where the accessory protrudes forward, upward, or diagonally from its initial position.

In addition, even when strong error 2 occurs, the game stop state occurs in the same way as when the safety device is activated, but if this game stop state starts while the movable accessory is in operation, the movable role If the object is located at an operating position other than the initial position, the production control device 300 may move the movable accessory from the operating position to return to the initial position, or may maintain the movable accessory at the operating position without returning to the initial position. It's okay. By returning the movable accessory to its initial position, unnecessary misunderstandings such as the movable member being out of order can be prevented. If the movable accessory is not returned to its initial position, it will be unnatural, making it easier for the player to recognize that an error has occurred in the gaming machine 10.

As another example, in the game stop state, various game processing timers such as the special figure game processing timer, the accessory game processing timer, and the general figure game processing timer are stopped, but the collective display device 50 does not turn off. The display when the game is stopped may be continued. Furthermore, if the collective display device 50 is in a fluctuating display at the start of the game stop state, it may be turned off after the fluctuating display ends. This can prevent the batch display device 50 from abruptly ending the variable display. Further, in the game stop state, the performance display device 152 may continue displaying.

Note that when the power to the gaming machine 10 is cut off (off) and then turned on again, the safety device counter area, safety device operation information area, etc. are initialized by the safety device information initialization process (
A1104-A1106), safety device activation information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), and safety device activation information (value 3) are deleted, so the display device 41 Safety device related displays (operation notice display 511, operation warning display 512, operating display 513, etc.) may be erased and hidden. When the power to the gaming machine 10 is cut off (turned off) while the safety device is in operation and then turned on again with the RAM initialization switch 112 on, the safety device in operation flag area is also cleared to 0 (A1045). The gaming machine 10 returns from the gaming stopped state to the gaming ready state.

[Specification example (specification example)]
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing spec examples 1 and 2 of the gaming machine 10.

In spec example 1, the gaming machine 10 is a 1 type and 2 type mixing machine, and plays right-handed in game states other than the normal game state. There are two special patterns (special pattern): special pattern 1 and special pattern 2. There are two big winning holes, the big winning hole 1 of the special variable winning device 38 and the big winning hole 2 of the special variable winning device 39. In addition, as mentioned above, when there is memory of starting the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed and the special figure 2 priority extinguishment (special figure 2 pending priority extinguishment, special figure 2 pending priority extinguishment, Fig. 2 Priority variation). Regarding both the big winning opening 1 and the big winning opening 2, the upper limit of the big winning opening count (
A3111) is 10.

In specification example 1, the number of prize balls obtained by winning is one for the starting winning hole 36 (starting hole 1), one for the normal variable winning device 37 (starting hole 2), and one ball for the general winning hole 35 on the left (top and bottom two). 1), 1 for the general prize opening 35 (lower) on the right side, and 15 for the large prize openings 1 and 2. The number of balls that can be played (the number of balls that can be obtained), which is the number of balls that can be obtained in one round, is 150 (= 15
x 10 counts).

The jackpot probability is the same for both the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game, and is 1/3.
It is 19.7. The small hit probability of the special figure 1 variable display game is 1/199.8. The small winning probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is 1/8.5, which is higher than the small winning probability of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, a small win in the special figure 2 variable display game is more likely to occur than a small win in the special figure 1 variable display game. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability and the small win probability are constant regardless of the probability setting value.

In the specification example 2, there is no big prize opening 2 of the special variable prize winning device 39, and there is no general prize opening 35 on the right side.
(Above) is added, and other points are the same as Spec Example 1.

[Distribution of jackpot symbols and small prize symbols]
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the distribution of jackpot symbols and small win symbols as stop symbols (stop results) of the special symbol fluctuation display game.

FIG. 70(A) shows the distribution of jackpot symbols (jackpot breakdown, ratio). The distribution of jackpot symbols is executed in the special pattern 1 stop pattern setting process or the special pattern 1 stop pattern setting process using special pattern random numbers (A4004, A4104). The distribution (ratio) of the jackpot symbols is different between the special pattern 1 variable display game and the special pattern 2 variable display game.

The jackpot symbols are 10R regular jackpot A symbol 1, 3R regular jackpot A symbol 2, 3R regular jackpot B symbol 3, and 3R regular jackpot C symbol. A certain jackpot pattern 4 and a jackpot pattern 5 which is a 10R normal jackpot B pattern
and jackpot symbol 6, which is the symbol of 10R normal jackpot C. In addition, in this embodiment, since there is no probability variable state where the jackpot probability becomes high, there is no probability variable jackpot, and only a normal jackpot.

Regarding the special figure 1 variable display game, jackpot symbols 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6 are 7% and 20%, respectively.
%, 30%, 30%, 13%. Regarding the stop symbols of the special figure 1 variable display game, there is no jackpot symbol 5 (rate of 0%).

Regarding the special figure 2 variable display game, the jackpot symbol 5 is distributed at a rate of 100%.
Regarding the stop symbols of the special figure 2 variable display game, there are no jackpot symbols 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6 (0%
percentage). Since the jackpot symbols that can be generated are different between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, it becomes easier to distinguish between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 jackpot, and game control is simplified.

FIG. 70(B) shows the distribution of small winning symbols (small winning breakdown, ratio). The distribution of small winning symbols is executed in the special pattern 1 stop pattern setting process or the special pattern 1 stop pattern setting process using special pattern random numbers (A4012, A4112). The distribution (ratio) of the small winning symbols is different between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.

As the small winning symbols, the small winning symbol 1 which is the symbol of 3R normal small winning A, the small winning symbol 2 which is the symbol of 10R normal small winning A, and the small winning symbol 3 which is the symbol of 10R normal small winning B. be. In addition, in this embodiment, since there is no variable probability state in which the probability of a small win becomes high, there is no variable probability small win, but only a normal small win.

Regarding the special figure 1 variable display game, the small winning symbol 1 is distributed at a rate of 100%.
Regarding the stop symbols of the special figure 1 variable display game, there are no small winning symbols 2 and 3 (0% rate).

Regarding the special figure 2 variable display game, small winning symbols 2 and 3 are distributed at a rate of 35% and 65%, respectively. Regarding the stop symbols of the special figure 2 variable display game, there is no small winning symbol 1 (0%
percentage). Since the small winning symbols that can be generated are different between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, it becomes easier to distinguish which small hit is between special figure 1 and special figure 2, and the game control is simplified. Ru.

[Number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot (number of support)]
FIG. 71 shows the game state (
A7002, A7009, A7010), the number of time reductions (initial value of time reduction variation number 2, first predetermined number of times) after the end of the jackpot is shown for each symbol. In addition, the total number of time reductions (the initial value of time reduction variation number 1, the second predetermined number of times) is the total number of changes until the time reduction ends (the total number of changes in the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game). ) is also shown at the same time. In addition, Figure 71
is obtained from the jackpot end setting process (FIG. 48) and the distribution of jackpot symbols and small win symbols (FIG. 70).

Further, in FIG. 71, various bonus performances executed by the performance control device 300 in response to a hit are also shown. The bonus performances may include jackpot performances such as fanfare performances, round performances, interval performances, and ending performances. In the case of a small winning symbol, the jackpot performance is executed by the V winning jackpot that occurs during the small winning.

In FIG. 71, low-accuracy no support (special 1) is when the special symbol 1 variable display game wins (i.e.,
Indicates that the gaming state at the end of winning variation and when winning stop display is low probability of special drawings and is not in general power support state (time saving state). Low probability support present (Special 1) indicates that the gaming state when the special figure 1 variable display game is won is a special figure low probability and general power support state. Low probability no support (special 2) indicates that the gaming state when the special symbol 2 variable display game is won is a special symbol low probability and is not a general power support state. Low probability support present (Special 2) indicates that the gaming state when the special figure 2 variable display game wins is a special figure low probability and general power support state. In addition, in this embodiment, since there is no probability change state, the special symbol probability is always low.

FIG. 71(A) shows the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot for each jackpot symbol. In addition, Figure 70
As shown in (A), the stop symbols of the special pattern 1 variable display game do not become the jackpot symbol 5, and the stop symbols of the special pattern 2 variable display game do not become the jackpot symbols 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6.

Regarding the special figure 1 variable display game, jackpot symbol 1 (10R normal jackpot A which is symbol type 4)
symbol), if the gaming state at the time of the hit is low and no support (the result of A7010 is "N"
”), the number of time reductions is 200, and the total number of time reductions is 204 (A7015). In this case, the type (system) of the bonus performance executed by the performance control device 300 after the fanfare is an eternal long bonus. Similarly, for jackpot symbol 1, if the gaming state at the time of winning is low-probability support (result of A7010 is "Y"), the number of time savings is 7 times, and the total number of time savings is 11 times ( A7020). In this case, the type (system) of the performance executed after the fanfare is an angel bonus.

Regarding the special figure 1 variable display game, if the gaming state at the time of winning is low probability supportless for jackpot symbols 2 and 3 (symbol type 2, 3R normal jackpot A symbol, 3R normal jackpot B symbol) In this case, the number of time reductions is 7 times, and the total number of time reductions is 11 times (A7020). In this case, the type of performance executed after the fanfare is a Vir Bonus, but among these performances, the fanfare performance (FF) and the ending performance (ED) are based on successes such as winning a battle on the screen of the display device 41. It is accompanied by a performance. Similarly, for jackpot symbols 2 and 3, if the gaming state at the time of winning is low probability support, the number of time savings is 7 times, and the total number of time savings is 11 times (A7020). In this case, the type of performance executed after the fanfare is a ville bonus.

Regarding the special figure 1 variable display game, if the gaming state at the time of winning is low probability no support for jackpot symbol 4 (3R normal jackpot C symbol which is symbol type 1) (result of A7002 is "N")
), the number of time savings is 0, the total number of time savings is 0, and there is no time reduction after winning the jackpot (A700
5). In this case, the type of performance executed after the fanfare is a burio bonus, but among the jackpot performances, the ending performance (ED) is accompanied by a failure performance such as losing a battle on the screen of the display device 41. Similarly, for jackpot symbol 4, if the gaming state at the time of winning is low-probability support (result of A7002 is "Y"), the number of time savings is 7 times, and the total number of time savings is 11 times ( A7020). In this case, the type of performance executed after the fanfare is a ville bonus.

Regarding the special figure 2 variable display game, jackpot symbol 5 (10R normal jackpot B which is symbol type 2)
symbol), when the gaming state at the time of winning is low probability support, the number of time savings is 7 times, and the total number of time savings is 11 times (A7020). In this case, the type of performance executed after the fanfare is an angel bonus. Similarly, for the jackpot symbol 5, if the gaming state at the time of winning is low probability support, the number of time savings is 7 times, and the total number of time savings is 11 times (A7020). In this case, the type of performance executed after the fanfare is an angel bonus.

Regarding the special figure 1 variable display game, jackpot symbol 6 (10R normal jackpot C which is symbol type 4)
symbol), if the gaming state at the time of the hit is low and no support (the result of A7010 is "N"
”), the number of time reductions is 200, and the total number of time reductions is 204 (A7015). In this case, the type of performance executed after the fanfare is an eternal long bonus, but the fanfare performance (FF) is accompanied by a success performance such as winning a battle on the screen of the display device 41. Similarly, for jackpot symbol 6, if the gaming state at the time of winning is low-probability support (
The result of A7010 is "Y"), the number of time savings is 7 times, and the total number of time savings is 11 times (A
7020). In this case, the type of performance executed after the fanfare is an angel bonus.

FIG. 71(B) shows the number of time reductions after the end of the V winning jackpot that occurred during the small winning for each small winning symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the stop symbols of the special figure 1 variable display game do not become the small hit symbols 2 and 3, and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 variable display game do not become the small hit symbol 1.

Regarding the special figure 1 variable display game, if the gaming state at the time of winning is low probability no support for small hit symbol 1 (3R normal small win A symbol which is symbol type 1) (result of A7002 is "N") ”
), the number of time savings is 0, the total number of time savings is 0, and there is no time reduction after the small hit (A700
5). In this case, the type of performance performed after the fanfare is simply a bonus. Similarly, for small winning symbol 1, if the gaming state at the time of winning is low support support (A700
2 result is "Y"), the number of time reductions is 7 times, and the total number of time reductions is 11 times (A7020
). In this case, the type of performance performed after the fanfare is simply a bonus.

Regarding the special figure 2 variable display game, small hit symbol 2 (10R normal small hit A which is symbol type 3)
symbol), if the gaming state at the time of the hit is low and no support (the result of A7009 is "N"
''), the number of time reductions is 7 times, and the total number of time reductions is 11 times (A7020). In this case, the type of performance executed after the fanfare is an angel bonus. Similarly, for small winning symbol 2, if the gaming state at the time of winning is low support support (result of A7009 is "Y"
”), the number of time reductions is 200, and the total number of time reductions is 204 (A7015). In this case, the performance executed after the fanfare will be an eternal long bonus.

Regarding the special figure 2 variable display game, small hit symbol 3 (10R normal small hit B which is symbol type 2)
symbol), when the gaming state at the time of winning is low probability support, the number of time savings is 7 times, and the total number of time savings is 11 times (A7020). In this case, the type of performance executed after the fanfare is an angel bonus. Similarly, for the small winning symbol 3, if the gaming state at the time of winning is low probability support, the number of time savings is 7 times, and the total number of time savings is 11 times (A7020). In this case, the type of performance executed after the fanfare is an angel bonus. In addition, even if the number of times of time saving is the same 7 times, the type of time saving mode (type of performance mode) may be different between the case without low accurate support and the case with low accurate support, such as support modes Bx and Bz.

Regarding FIG. 71(B), the performances of the eternal long bonus, angel bonus, and bonus may be performed not only as a jackpot performance by the V prize winning jackpot but also as a small win performance. Further, the number of small winning symbols may be increased to further broaden the range of game characteristics and improve the interest of the game. For example, a small winning symbol 4 may be provided, and after the end of the V winning jackpot for low-probability supportless (special 2), the system is moved to support mode A with a time saving number of 200 times, so that support mode A can be repeatedly generated.

In addition, in FIGS. 71(A) and (B), the number of time reductions is 100 and the total number of time reductions is 104 (10
0/104), etc., and only the type of production mode and the type of bonus after the end of the jackpot may be made different depending on the winning symbol and whether there is low probability support or not.

In addition, the eternal long bonus performance shown in Figures 71 (A) and (B) may be continued even in the time-saving state after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot performance related to the consecutive jackpot that occurs when winning in the time-saving state. But you can continue.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 72 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state in the first embodiment. The gaming state transitions (transfers) by the gaming control of the gaming control device 100.
In particular, the gaming states are shown to change when a jackpot occurs, and after a predetermined number of games (number of rotations, number of changes) pass. In Figure 72, for each game state, the state of the jackpot probability (special figure probability), the presence or absence of general power support (electricity support), the production mode, the main variable display game (main variable display game, main variation), right Characteristics such as hitting or left-handed firing mode are shown.

In addition, the performance mode (namely, performance mode number) can be set by the game control device 100 by the jackpot end process (FIG. 47), the performance mode information check process (FIG. 33), etc., as described above. In addition, a configuration is also possible in which the production control device 300 sets the production mode based on the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game, the number of time reductions, the number of remaining reservations, etc.

In the first embodiment, the gaming states include a normal gaming state, a specific gaming state, and a transition state. In this embodiment, the specific gaming state is a time saving state, but it is also possible to configure the specific gaming state to be a probability variable state where the jackpot probability is high.

Note that in the transition state, the jackpot probability and the presence or absence of power support are the same as in the normal gaming state, so the transition state may be included in the normal gaming state. That is, the transition state may be regarded as a normal game state in which the main variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game. However, in the transition state,
The special figure 2 variable display game is executed by the consumption of the remaining reservation, and the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the main variable display game.
/8.5). Therefore, the transition state is an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than normal, and from this point of view, it may be regarded as a gaming state that can be distinguished from the normal gaming state. Further, the transition state and the specific gaming state (time saving state) may be combined into an advantageous state advantageous to the player, or the specific gaming state (time saving state) may be the first advantageous state and the transition state may be the second advantageous state. It may also be a state.

First, each gaming state will be explained. In the normal gaming state, the gaming control device 100
The jackpot probability is set to be low (special map low probability), and there is no regular electricity support (state without electricity support). Further, in the normal game state, the performance mode is the normal mode. In the normal gaming state, left-handed hitting, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the first starting prize opening 36, is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting, and is recommended as the game ball firing mode. The main starting area in which the game ball is likely to win in the recommended firing mode becomes the first starting winning hole 36, and the main variable display game becomes the special figure 1 variable display game. The secondary start area where it is difficult for game balls to win in the recommended firing mode becomes the normal variable winning device 37, and the secondary variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game.

In the specific game state (time saving state), the game control device 100 controls the jackpot probability to be in a low probability state, but in a state with general power support (power support available state). In the specific game state, as the firing mode of the game ball, it is recommended that the normal variable prize winning device 37 be opened more easily, and that a right-handed shot aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 is recommended. Therefore, in a specific game state, the main starting area becomes the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting area becomes the first starting winning hole 36, so the main variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game. It will be a special figure 1 variable display game.

Specific gaming states include specific gaming state A, which is a time saving state (a time saving) that occurs immediately after a jackpot due to a jackpot, and a time saving state that occurs due to reaching the ceiling number of times not due to a jackpot (ceiling time saving, b time saving). A specific game state B that is, the stop display of time-saving symbols without being caused by a jackpot (support hit)
Includes a specific gaming state C which is a time saving state (sudden time saving, c time saving) that occurs.

In specific game state A, when the number of time reductions is 7 times (m1) and when 20 times is greater than 7 times,
There are different time saving states when the number of times (m2) is zero. As described above, the performance mode in the time-saving state with the number of time-savings = 200 is defined as the time-saving mode #1A (support mode A), and the performance mode in the time-saving state with the number of time-savings = 7 is defined as the time-saving mode #1B (support mode B). The interest of the game may be improved by differentiating the mode of performance in the time-saving mode #1A and the time-saving mode #1B. In addition, time saving mode #1B
The number of time saving times may be, for example, about the reciprocal value (7 to 9 times) of the small winning probability 1/8.5 of the special figure 2 variable display game. The smaller the number of time saving times in time saving mode #1B, the less likely a small hit will occur in time saving mode #1B, while the difference from production mode #1A will become larger and more sharp.

The specific gaming state B is a time saving state in which the number of time saving times is m3 (here, 251 times). The specific game state C is a time saving state where the number of time saving times is m4. The number m4 of time saving in the specific game state C is 30 or 10 depending on the type of time saving symbol. The performance mode of specific game state B is time saving mode #
3, the performance mode of specific game state C is time saving mode #4, and the player is in the ceiling time saving mode (b
It is possible to distinguish between a time-saving state due to a sudden time-saving (time-saving) and a time-saving state due to a sudden time-saving (c-time saving). In addition, time-saving modes #3 and #4 are production modes different from time-saving modes #1A and #1B, and are a time-saving state caused by a jackpot (specific gaming state A) and a time-saving state not caused by a jackpot (specific gaming state B, C) can be distinguished by the performance.

The transition state is a state that can occur after the specific gaming state (time saving state) ends. In the transition state, the remaining reservation generated by winning the normal variable prize winning device 37 (general power) that is released by winning the normal figure in the specific gaming state is exhausted, and the special figure 2 variable display game is executed as the main variable display game. Ru. The production mode in the transition state is the remaining pending consumption mode.

Next, transitions from each gaming state will be explained with reference to FIG. 72.

In the normal gaming state, when a direct jackpot or small hit (+V prize jackpot) occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game, the figure As shown by the number of time reductions (0, 7, 200) in 71, after the jackpot state ends, a transition is made to the specific gaming state A or the normal gaming state. In addition, in FIG. 72, the case where the special figure 2 variable display game wins in the normal gaming state is not described because it is rare. Specifically, in the normal game state, when the jackpot symbol 1 (10R normal jackpot A, 10R normal jackpot C) is stopped and displayed, the time saving mode #1A (support mode A) with a time saving number of 200 times is entered, and the jackpot symbol 2,
By the stop display of 3 (3R normal jackpot A, B), it moves to time saving mode #1B (support mode B) with 7 time saving times, and jackpot symbol 4 (3R normal jackpot C) and small win symbol 1 (3R normal small win) With the stop display in C), the game returns to the normal gaming state.

In the time saving mode #1A (support mode A) of the specific gaming state A, the gaming state at the time of the small hit (+V prize jackpot) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (that is, when the small winning fluctuation ends) is low. In response to the fact that there is no support (Special 2), or in the case of a direct hit jackpot in the special figure 2 variable display game, the game state when it hits is with low-probability support (Special 2). , as shown by the time saving number (7) in FIG. 71, after the jackpot state ends, the time saving mode #1B of the specific gaming state A
(Support mode B). In addition, in FIG. 72, the case where the special figure 1 variable display game wins in the specific game state A is not described because it is rare. Specifically, time saving mode #1A
At this time, by stopping display of small winning symbols 2 and 3 (10R normal small winnings A, B) and jackpot symbol 5 (10R normal jackpot B), the mode shifts to time saving mode #1B (support mode B) with 7 time saving times.

In the time-saving mode #1B (support mode B) of the specific gaming state A, the gaming state at the time of the small hit (+V prize jackpot) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (that is, when the small winning fluctuation ends) is low. In response to the fact that there is support (Special 2), or in the case of a direct hit jackpot in the special figure 2 variable display game, the game state when it is hit is with low probability support (Special 2). As shown by the time saving number (7,200) in FIG. 71, after the end of the jackpot state, the game changes to the time saving mode #1A (support mode A) of the specific gaming state A or returns to the time saving mode #1B (support mode B). Specifically, in time saving mode #1B, when the small winning symbol 2 (10R normal small winning A) is stopped, the time saving mode #1A (support mode A) with the number of time saving times of 200 is entered, and the small winning symbol 3 (10R By the stop display of normal small hit B) and jackpot pattern 5 (10R normal jackpot B),
Return to time saving mode #1B (support mode B) with 7 time saving times. Even if you win with the same small winning symbol 2 (10R normal small winning A), the destination after the winning state from support mode A will be support mode B, but the destination after the winning state from support mode B will be support mode A. Therefore, the range of games is expanded and the variations of games are richer, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when returning to time-saving mode #1B and when moving from time-saving mode #1A to time-saving mode #1B, the type of time-saving mode #1B (type of production mode) can be changed to, for example, time-saving mode #1Bx, time-saving mode #1Bz. It may be different as follows.

In each game state, when the number of special figure fluctuation display games executed after the end of the jackpot state (excluding the number of times in the probability change state) reaches the ceiling number of times, the ceiling time is shortened (b time shortened) and the specific game state B (time shortened) is reached. Shift to mode #3). In addition, in each game state, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is a support hit result (time saving result, time saving symbol), the time is suddenly shortened (c time saving) and the game shifts to a specific game state C (time saving mode #4). Note that even if a support win result occurs in specific gaming states B and C, the transition to specific gaming state C and the generation of a new specific gaming state C are prohibited. In addition, in this embodiment, since there is no support hit in the special figure 2 variable display game, basically the stop display of the time-saving symbol (support hit) changes the specific game state A from the transition state (remaining pending consumption mode). There is no transition to state C. Note that the transition from the specific gaming state A to the specific gaming state C may be prohibited without exception.

In specific gaming states B and C, in response to the fact that the gaming state at the time of the small hit (+V prize jackpot) of the special figure 2 variable display game is low-probability supportless (special 2), or In the case of a direct jackpot in the special figure 2 variable display game, the game state at the time of winning is low probability support (special 2), so as shown by the time saving number (7) in FIG. After the end, a transition is made to the time saving mode #1B (support mode B) of the specific gaming state A. In addition, in FIG. 72, the case where the special figure 1 variable display game wins in specific game states B and C is not described because it is rare. Specifically, in specific gaming states B and C, small winning symbols 2 and 3 (10R normal small winning A and B)
When the jackpot symbol 5 (10R normal jackpot B) is stopped and displayed, the mode shifts to the time saving mode #1B (support mode B) where the number of time reductions is 7 times.

In the transition state (remaining pending consumption mode), in the case of a small hit (+V prize jackpot) or a direct jackpot in the special figure 2 variable display game, the gaming state at the time of the win is low probability supportless (special 2). Correspondingly, as shown by the time saving number (7) in FIG. 71, after the jackpot state ends, the specific game state A
Transition to time-saving mode #1B (support mode B). In addition, in FIG. 72, the case where the special symbol 1 variable display game wins in the remaining pending consumption mode is not described because it is rare. Specifically, in the transition state, small hit symbols 2 and 3 (10R normal small hit A, B) and jackpot symbol 5 (
When the 10R normal jackpot B) is stopped and displayed, the mode shifts to time saving mode #1B (support mode B) where the number of time reductions is 7 times.

In addition, even if you hit with the same small winning pattern 2 (10R normal small winning A), the destination after the winning state from the remaining reservation consumption mode is support mode B (the winning performance is angel bonus), but from support mode B. Since the transition destination after a winning state is support mode A (the winning performance is an eternal long bonus), the range of game properties is widened and the variation of the game is rich, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, in the case where the performance of the eternal long bonus continues in the jackpot state and the time shortening state, even if you win from the remaining pending consumption mode, the performance of the eternal long bonus will be interrupted, but the continuous chance itself may continue.

In the case of winning in the remaining hold consumption mode and in the case of winning in time saving mode #1A (support mode A), the gaming state at the time of winning is low probability no support, so the destination gaming state after the winning state The types are the same (see also FIG. 71). In particular, if you win in the special map 2 variable display game in the remaining pending consumption mode and time saving mode #1A (support mode A),
As shown in 2, the type of gaming state to which the transition is made after the winning state is time-saving mode #1B with a number of time-savings of 7 times.
(Support mode B) only.

When the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving ends and the specific game state transitions to a transition state (remaining pending consumption mode). This time-saving termination condition is that (i) the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game in a specific gaming state exceeds the time-saving number (the first predetermined number of times, the initial value of the time-saving variation number 2), or (ii) the specified The total number of time saving times (second predetermined number of times, time (initial value of the number of shortening fluctuations 1). In addition,
The total number of time reductions is the sum of the maximum value (for example, 4) of the number of reserved special drawings 1 to the number of time reductions. Although not shown in FIG. 72 because it is rare, the time-saving end conditions may also include (iii) the occurrence of a special drawing 2 small hit and no V winning.

In addition, the time saving termination conditions for the time saving to end when transitioning from the specific gaming state to the jackpot state (including the V winning jackpot state) are (iv) the occurrence of a special drawing 2 small hit and a V winning, or (v)
) A direct jackpot will occur. Note that (iv) may also be the fact that the special drawing 2 small win has occurred regardless of the V winning (see FIG. 31). In addition, (iv) may include the fact that a special drawing 1 small win occurs and a V prize is won.

In addition, time saving mode #1A (support mode A, number of time saving times = 200), time saving mode #1B (support mode B, number of time saving times = 7), time saving mode #3 (number of time saving times = 251), time saving mode #4 (
Regarding the number of time reductions = 30 or 10), among the time reduction end conditions, conditions (iii), (iv), and (v) are the same, but condition (i) regarding the number of time reductions and condition (ii) regarding the total number of time reductions. is different. Therefore, while simplifying game control, the range of game properties and variations of games are increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Typical game flow]
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a typical game flow extracted from FIG. 72, and shows support mode A.
, B shows the transition of the number of time reductions. It should be noted that as for the jackpot that occurs from support modes A and B, there is a high possibility that a V winning jackpot via a small win will occur due to the high probability of a small win.

When a jackpot (small hit + V prize jackpot) occurs from the first support mode A, regardless of the type of 10R normal small hit symbol, the number of time savings in the time saving mode after the jackpot is 7 times (support mode B)
become. In addition, as shown by the thick arrow in FIG. 73, from support mode A to jackpot (small hit +
After winning the prize jackpot), you will almost certainly move to support mode B, which will save you 7 times. this is,
This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game is 1/8.5, so a small hit will almost certainly occur in support mode A with 200 times of time saving. Therefore, the support mode A becomes a next continuation confirmation mode (decision mode) in which the specific gaming state (support mode B) is reliably continued after the end of the jackpot state.

Since you can get 1500 (=10 x 150) balls in 10R (number of balls acquired, game value),
In the route indicated by the thick arrow in Figure 73, there is a jackpot that generates support mode A and support mode B.
A total of 3,000 balls will almost certainly be obtained, and the game will be more interesting. In this way, with regard to consecutive support modes A and B, two jackpots (two consecutive jackpots) form one set, and a total of 3000 balls can almost certainly be obtained. Furthermore, if a direct jackpot occurs from the normal gaming state and the game enters the specific gaming state A, a total of 4,500 or more balls may be obtained.

Then, a jackpot (small hit + V prize jackpot) occurs again from support mode B, and the number of time savings in the time saving mode after the jackpot may be 200 times (second support mode A) (35%
probability). In this case, a total of 3000 balls can be reliably obtained by going through the route indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 73. In this way, if you go through the route indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 73 twice, you will get a total of 6000 balls due to the four consecutive jackpots. In addition, a jackpot (small hit + V winning jackpot) may occur again from support mode B, and the number of time reductions in the time saving mode after the jackpot may be 7 times (second support mode B) (65% probability). In this case, the number of 1500 balls per 10R that caused the second support mode B is added, and a total of 4500 balls will be obtained by the three consecutive jackpots (for the second time) (Unless it hits in support mode B).

In addition, when a jackpot (small hit + V prize jackpot) occurs from support mode B, the number of time reductions in the time saving mode after the jackpot is 200 times (support mode A) depending on the type of 10R normal small winning symbol.
Or 7 times (support mode B). As shown in Figure 70, the probability that the number of time savings will be 200 is 35% with the distribution of 10R normal small win A, and the probability that the number of time savings will be 7 is the distribution of 10R normal small win B. The ratio is 65%. Further, if a jackpot (small hit + V prize winning jackpot) does not occur during the seven time saving times of support mode B, the time saving ends and the remaining reservation consumption mode (transition state) is entered. In addition, if the special figure 2 variable display game hits a small hit (+V winning jackpot) or a direct jackpot in the remaining pending consumption mode, the time saving mode will be activated again after the jackpot, but the number of time saving times in this time saving mode will eventually change. In the case of , it will also be 7 times (support mode B).

In this way, by the jackpot from support mode B (small hit + V prize winning jackpot), 3000
Can you get the number of balls that come out (thick arrow: route from support mode A to support mode B) or 150?
Whether or not a number of balls of 0 is obtained (thin line support mode B→time-saving end) is important for the game quality of the game.

[Example of screen transition]
74A to 74C are examples of screen transitions showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order. It should be noted that the screen transitions almost correspond to the transitions of the gaming states as indicated by the thick arrows in FIG. 73.

In (A), the game is in a normal gaming state, and the mode display 679 displays "Normal Mode" as the production mode. The variation number display 677 indicates the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the power is turned on or after the end of the jackpot, and here, the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the power is turned on is 15.
5 is indicated as "155G". In addition, in the case of a model that can generate a variable probability state, the number of fluctuations display 677 will show the special symbol fluctuation after the power is turned on or after the jackpot ends, excluding the number of times in the variable probability state, in order to make it easier to understand that the number of fluctuations is approaching the ceiling. It may indicate the number of times the displayed game has been executed. In addition, the fluctuation number display 677 shows the remaining number of games until the ceiling (the number of times the ceiling is played - the number of executions)
may be shown.

The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (changing), and the second predetermined image 676 is the symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being stopped. There is a symbol "x" to indicate this. A fourth symbol variation may be performed by displaying a blinking symbol "○" as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

On the display screen, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are used as decorative special symbols (large symbols).
, and the middle symbol 611c can be displayed in a variable manner. Left pattern 611a, right pattern 611b
, the medium symbol 611c are displayed in the left variable display area 610A, the right variable display area 610B, and the center variable display area 610C in the large variable display area 610, respectively. In this embodiment, the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c are variably displayed by vertical scrolling. Further, a variable display of the decorative reduced symbols (small symbols) is performed in a small variable display area 615 on the right side of the display screen.

Three pending displays 682a (first pending displays) are displayed in the first pending display section 630a (standby area) that displays the first starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory) before the variable display game is executed as the first pending display. be done. The pending display 682a has a display mode that resembles a playing card. In addition, in the hold extinguishing area 640, a pending change display 682b indicating a hold during change (the starting memory that was the right to execute this special figure change display game) related to the special figure 1 change display game being executed is displayed. It is displayed in a display style that resembles playing cards. Note that nothing is displayed here in the second hold display section 630b that displays the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game as the second hold display (second start memory display). do not have.

In the upper right corner of the display screen, the special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 display the numbers "3" and special figure 2, respectively, which indicate the number of special symbols 1 reserved (the number of special symbols 1 starting memory). The number "0" indicating the number of reservations (number of special figure 2 starting memories) is displayed.

Next, in (i), after (a), the special figure variable display game (here, the special figure 1 variable display game) results in a direct jackpot, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the variable display area 610 as a decorative stop symbol. displayed in area 615. In addition, here, the jackpot symbol is jackpot symbol 1.
(10R normal jackpot A) or jackpot symbol 6 (10R normal jackpot C), and an example in which "7, 7, 7" is displayed as the stop symbol corresponding to symbol type 4 is shown.

The pending change display 682b disappears, and the first predetermined image 675 and the second predetermined image 676 are marked with an "x". A mode display 679 displays "normal mode" as the production mode.
The number of fluctuations display 677 is displayed as "170G". "3" and "0" are displayed in the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660, respectively. Three hold displays 682a are displayed on the first hold display section 630a, and nothing is displayed on the second hold display section 630b.

Next, in (c), a pattern consisting of multiple star-shaped characters 507 and the text "Win!!"
By displaying , a jackpot fanfare effect is performed at the start of the jackpot state. The pattern is only displayed for the Eternal Long Bonus, and for bonuses other than the Eternal Long Bonus,
For example, it does not need to be displayed for Briwo Bonus and Viru Bonus. Also, the pattern does not appear in the small win fanfare performance.

Next, (e) shows how the jackpot round effect is executed from the first to the 10th round. (E) shows the display screen for the 10th round, but the same applies to the 1st to 9th rounds. Right-handed batting instruction display 50 instructing to bat right-handed
2 is displayed.

Here, with respect to the value 3000 of the obtainable ball number display 506, the number of balls actually played (number of acquired balls) obtained since the start of the jackpot is displayed as 1490, for example, by the ball number display 505.
As mentioned above, the number of balls that can be obtained in one round (number of balls that can be obtained) is 150, so 10
If it is the second round, the actual number of balls won will be approximately 1350 or more.

The obtainable number of balls display 506 indicates the number of balls that can be obtained in a predetermined period from the start of the jackpot (the obtainable number of balls, the expected number of balls to be obtained). The predetermined period here is basically a period during which the predetermined effects (eternal long bonus, angel bonus, ville bonus, etc. in FIG. 71) executed after the fanfare continue. In addition, here, jackpot pattern 1 (10R normal jackpot A)
Or, since it is a jackpot of jackpot symbol 6 (10R normal jackpot C), the predetermined performance executed after the fanfare is an eternal long bonus, and after the jackpot ends, it shifts to support mode A (time saving mode #1A). Therefore, the player will proceed along the route from support mode A to support mode B as indicated by the bold line arrow in FIG. 73, and it is possible (planned) to obtain 3000 balls by hitting the jackpot in two consecutive chances. Note that with bonuses other than the Eternal Long Bonus such as the Angel Bonus and Vir Bonus, it is possible to obtain a number of balls of 1500, so the value of the obtainable number of balls display 506 is 1500.

In this embodiment, the eternal long bonus consists of a plurality of story presentations executed at the center of the display screen, and the story presentation (story 1) of the first episode is executed from the first to the tenth round. There are commonalities so that it can be recognized that the multiple story presentations are related to each other, and for example, as a common display, a text display "Eternal Long Bonus" and a character 508 that physically resembles a tiger are displayed. The eternal long bonus is not limited to this, and may be composed of, for example, a plurality of common battle effects (effects in which characters compete in the center of the screen). In addition, the eternal long bonus may start from the jackpot fanfare performance in (U).

Next, in (E), after the ending performance of the direct hit jackpot ends, that is, after the jackpot ends, the time saving state is entered and the performance mode is set to support mode A (time saving mode #1A). The mode display 679 displays "Mode A" indicating support mode A.

At the center of the display screen, the performance of the eternal long bonus continues since the jackpot, and the story performance of the second episode (story 2) is executed at the center of the display screen. As a common display in the story presentation, a character display "Eternal Long Bonus" and a character 508 which physically resembles a tiger are displayed. Because it interferes with the story presentation, the decorative special symbols (large symbols) are not displayed in the large variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen, but the small variable display area 615 on the right side of the display screen displays the reduced decorative symbols ( A special figure 2 variable display game with small symbols) is being executed.

Here, the number of balls that can be obtained in a predetermined period from the start of the jackpot (number of balls that can be obtained) is 3
000, the number of balls actually won from the start of the jackpot (number of balls acquired) is the number of balls displayed 50
5 is displayed as 1510. In addition, the right hit instruction display 502 continues to be displayed during the jackpot state. In this way, the value 3000 of the obtainable pitch count display 506 and the right-handed hitting instruction display 502 continue from the jackpot state, which helps the player to recognize that the eternal long bonus performance is continuing. In addition, with the Eternal Long Bonus, it is possible to obtain as many as 3,000 balls, and the safety device operates faster, so the aforementioned operation notice display (for example, "
When displaying the text "Soon to be discontinued", it may be displayed more prominently than for other bonuses.

The variation number display 677 indicates that the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the jackpot is 30, such as "30G". The first predetermined image 675 has a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 shows that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (fluctuating). There is a symbol “○” to indicate this. In the hold extinguishing area 640, a hold during change display 683b indicating a hold during change related to the special figure 2 change display game being executed (the starting memory that was the right to execute this special figure change display game) is shaped like a flower. It is displayed in the display mode. In addition, there is a high expectation that the special figure 2 variable display game that is being executed will result in a small hit, and the color of the variable pending display 683b changes from the normal color (for example, white) to a different color (for example, green). A pending change notice is being executed.

The number display section 650 for the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number display section 660 for the number of reserved special drawings 2 display the number "0" indicating the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number "4" indicating the number of reserved special drawings 2, respectively. . In the second suspension display section 630b that displays the second starting memory as a second suspension display, four suspension displays 683a (second suspension displays) are displayed. The pending display 683a has a display mode imitating a flower. Note that nothing is displayed on the first suspension display section 630a that displays the first starting memory before execution of the variable display game as a first suspension display.

Here, regarding the fourth hold display 683a that has occurred most recently, a hold change notice in which the color changes from a normal color (for example, white) to a different color (for example, red) as a display mode has been executed since the time of occurrence. In addition, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the starting memory of the fourth pending display 683a will result in a stop result of small hit symbol 2 (10R normal small hit A), and if it becomes a small hit result in support mode B, the time will be shortened after the V winning jackpot. Assume that it is determined that support mode A will be used 200 times.

Next, in (ka), the special figure 2 variable display game of (o) ends, and the decoration stops for the small hit stop pattern 2 (10R normal small win A symbol, symbol type 3) in the variable display area 615. The symbol is displayed as "5, 5, 5". Since the transition destination after a hit from support mode A is support mode B regardless of the winning pattern (Figures 72 and 73), the winning pattern is not small hit stop pattern 2 but small hit stop pattern 3 (10R normal small hit B The symbol or symbol type 2) may be used. The pending change display 683b disappears, and the second predetermined image 676 becomes "x". Other displays are basically (
Continuing from (o).

Next, in (ki), by displaying the characters "Win!!", a small win fanfare effect is performed at the start of the small win state. Instead of the text "Win!!", "Aim for V"
It may be displayed as The small win fanfare effect is plain, and the text "Win!!" is displayed smaller than the jackpot fanfare effect for the direct hit jackpot in (U), and unlike this jackpot fanfare effect, the pattern consisting of multiple star-shaped characters 507 is Not displayed. In addition, the fanfare effect for direct jackpots in (U) will be flashy only when the Eternal Long Bonus occurs, and for Angel Bonuses, Vir Bonuses, etc. other than the Eternal Long Bonus,
You can use the same plain production as (ki). In (ki), the character 508 is continuously displayed, and it can be recognized that the eternal long bonus is continuing. Here, right-handed hitting instruction display 5
02, the ball output display 505 and the obtainable ball number display 506 are continuously displayed, but may be deleted and hidden.

Next, in (k), the second special variable prize winning device 39 (big prize opening) is being opened for a small win, and a character display "Aim for V" is displayed to encourage the player to aim for a V prize. Displayed. Here, a right-handed batting instruction display 502, a ball output display 505, an obtainable ball number display 506 (value 3000
) continues to be displayed. The character 508 also continues to be displayed, and it can be recognized that the eternal long bonus is continuing. The text "Eternal Long Bonus" may be displayed.

Next, in (ke), the game ball wins a V prize in the specific area 86 (V winning hole) in the second special variable winning device 39, and a V winning jackpot occurs. Then, the text "Congratulations" is displayed as an effect to notify the player of the V win. The character 508 is continuously displayed, and it can be recognized that the eternal long bonus is continuing. The right-handed batting instruction display 502, the number of pitched balls display 505, and the number of obtainable pitches display 506 are continuously displayed.

However, the hold information () corresponding to the fourth hold display 683a that has changed to hold (O) and (Ka)
B1711) is loaded again from the look-ahead variation command area, etc., and the value of the obtainable pitch count display 506 is changed from 3000 to 6000 as a look-ahead effect. As a result, the player recognizes that the number of balls that can be won from the start of the jackpot has increased, and the interest in the game increases. From then on, the value of the obtainable pitch count display 506 is maintained at 6000. However, from 3001 to 6000
If the number of balls put out (number of balls acquired) reaches the standard value of 95,000 balls during the period, the safety device will be activated after the jackpot ends, so the number of balls that can be obtained display 506 will be set so that the player does not have expectations. The value may be maintained at 3000 instead of changing from 3000 to 6000.

In addition, as mentioned above, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the starting memory of the fourth pending display 683a will result in the stop result of small hit symbol 2 (10R normal small win A), and if the small hit result is obtained in support mode B. It is confirmed that after winning the V-winning jackpot, you will be in support mode A with 200 time-savings. Therefore, the second route indicated by the thick arrow in Fig. 73 will occur later, and the total number of routes will be 60.
Since a ball number of 00 is obtained, the value of the obtainable ball number display 506 is changed from 3000 to 6000.

Next, in (this), after the V winning jackpot fanfare production, the V winning jackpot round starts as the 2nd round (number of rounds = 2), and the story of the 3rd episode is displayed as an eternal long bonus in the center of the display screen. The production (story 3) is executed. The text display ``Eternal Long Bonus'' and a character 508 shaped like a tiger are displayed. In addition, regarding the character display "Eternal Long Bonus" as a production, (e) direct hit jackpot (rounds 1 to 10) and (
The display format may be different from this) V winning jackpot (rounds 2 to 10) by changing the font, size, and color. The right-handed batting instruction display 502, the number of pitched balls display 505, and the number of obtainable pitches display 506 are continuously displayed.

Next, in (sa), the V-winning jackpot round is the 10th round as the final round (
The case where the number of rounds=10) is shown. The display screen of (sa) shows the number of rounds (ROU
Only the values of ND10) and number of balls displayed 505 are different from this display screen.

Next, in (shi), after the ending performance of the V winning jackpot, that is, after the jackpot is finished,
It is in a time saving state and the performance mode is support mode B (time saving mode #1B). A mode display 679 displays "Mode B" indicating support mode B. Right-handed hitting instruction display 50
2. The ball count display 505 and the obtainable ball count display 506 are continuously displayed.

At the center of the display screen, the performance of the eternal long bonus continues, and at the center of the display screen, the story performance of the fourth episode (story 4) is executed. As a common display in the story presentation, a character display "Eternal Long Bonus" and a character 508 which physically resembles a tiger are displayed. As in mode A (E), the special figure 2 variable display game with decorative reduced symbols (small symbols) is executed only in the small variable display area 615 on the right side of the display screen. The first predetermined image 675 is the symbol “
×”, and the second predetermined image 676 has a symbol “○”.

Moreover, in (shi), since the fourth special figure 2 variation display game is being executed after the end of the jackpot, the variation number display 677 displays "4G". In the pending extinguishing area 640, a pending pending display 683b indicating a pending pending change related to the special figure 2 variable display game that is being executed is displayed. Here, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is based on the starting memory of the fourth pending display 683a (with pending change) that existed before the small hit in (o) and (ka), and the small hit pattern 2 (
The stop result of 10R normal small hit A) has been determined. Therefore, as the display mode of the changing pending display 683b, a pending change notice in which the color changes from a normal color (for example, white) to a different color (for example, red or gold) is displayed during a pending shift (when the pending display moves). Or it has been running before that.

The number display section 650 for the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number display section 660 for the number of reserved special drawings 2 display the number "0" indicating the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number "1" indicating the number of reserved special drawings 2, respectively. . In the second suspension display section 630b that displays the second starting memory as a second suspension display, one suspension display 683a (second suspension display) is displayed.

Next, in (su), the special figure 2 variable display game of (shi) ends, and in the variable display area 615, the small hit stop symbol 2 (10R normal small win A symbol) is displayed as suggested in the pending change notice.
is displayed as "7, 7, 7". The floating pending display 683b disappears, and the second predetermined image 67
6 is marked "×". Other indications basically continue from (shi). Even with the same small hit stop symbol 2 (10R normal small win A symbol, symbol type 3), the decoration stop symbol is "7, 7, 7" for (su)'s support mode B, but (ka)'s support mode The decorative stop symbols for A are "5, 5, 5", and the decorative stop symbols differ depending on the support mode in which the small winning special symbol variable display game has started. However, regarding both (a)'s support mode A and (su)'s support mode B, in the special figure display (special figure 2 display 52) of the batch display device 50 that has executed the small hit special figure fluctuation display game, The same small hit stop pattern 2 (10R normal small win A pattern) is displayed as a pattern related to the same stop pattern number.

In addition, in this embodiment, the production control device 300 is in support mode A (time saving mode #1A
), the small winning decorative stop symbols are set to group A that does not include "7, 7, 7" (for example, "1,
1,1,” “3,3,3,” “5,5,5”) and display it on the display screen, and select Support Mode B.
(Time saving mode #1B), the decorative stop symbols for the small hit are group B (including "7, 7, 7").
For example, it is selected from "7, 7, 7" and "9, 9, 9" and displayed on the display screen. However, in the case of a promotion effect, "5, 5, 5" may be displayed first, and then "7, 7, 7" may be displayed. Note that group A and support mode B may or may not have overlapping decorative stop symbols. On the other hand, on the special symbol display of the batch display device 50, the same small hit stop symbols are displayed based on the same stop symbol number regardless of the time saving mode.

In this way, for the eternal long bonus that can be generated from support mode B and has a large number of balls to be played (gaming value), a specific decorative stop symbol "7, 7, 7" can be displayed before the eternal long bonus starts. For example, it becomes an eternal long bonus for the small hit stop pattern 2 (10R normal small win A pattern) on the special figure 2 display from support mode B, and the small hit decorative stop pattern on the display device 41 is a specific decorative stop pattern. Make sure that "7, 7, 7" is selected. On the other hand, support mode B
The small hit stop symbol 3 (10R normal small win B symbol) on the special figure 2 display from is an angel bonus, and the small hit decorative stop symbol on the display 41 is set to "9, 9, 9". do. In addition, small hit stop symbols 2 and 3 on the special figure 2 display from support mode A (10R normal small hit A
, B symbol) also becomes an angel bonus, but the small winning decoration stop symbol on the display device 41 is "
1, 1, 1,” “3, 3, 3,” and “5, 5, 5.”

In addition, like (i), (u), and (e), the jackpot symbol 1 on the special symbol 2 display from the normal gaming state
(10R normal jackpot A) or jackpot pattern 6 (10R normal jackpot C), it becomes an eternal long bonus, but the jackpot decoration stop pattern on the display device 41 is a specific decoration stop pattern from a group of predetermined decoration stop patterns. Make sure that "7, 7, 7" is selected.

The following (se) (so) (ta) differs from (ki) (ku) (ke) only in the values of the ball output display 505 and the obtainable pitch display 506; other displays are the same. It is. In addition, if the look-ahead effect that changes the value of the obtainable pitch count display 506 from 3000 to 6000 from (ke) to (su) is not executed, either (se) (so) (ta) The value of the obtainable pitch count display 506 may be changed from 3000 to 6000 at the stage, especially at the (ta) V winning stage.

Next, in (c), after the V prize winning jackpot fanfare production, the V prize winning jackpot round starts as the second round, and the story production of episode 5 (story 5) is displayed as an eternal long bonus in the center of the display screen. executed. (C) differs from (C) only in the story presentation and the value of the ball number display 505, and the other displays are the same. Thereafter, the V-winning jackpot rounds are executed up to the 10th and final round.

Next, in (1), after the ending of the V-winning jackpot, that is, after the jackpot ends,
It is in a time saving state and the performance mode is support mode A (time saving mode #1A). The mode display 679 displays "Mode A" indicating support mode A. Right-handed hitting instruction display 502
, the number of balls put out display 505, and the number of obtainable balls display 506 are continuously displayed.

At the center of the display screen, the performance of the eternal long bonus continues, and at the center of the display screen, the story performance of the sixth episode (story 6) is executed. As a common display in the story presentation, a character display "Eternal Long Bonus" and a character 508 which physically resembles a tiger are displayed. Similar to the support mode A of (E), the special figure 2 variable display game with decorative reduced symbols (small symbols) is executed only in the small variable display area 615 on the right side of the display screen.

After that, since support mode A is the next continuation confirmation mode, like from (ka) to (sa),
By the occurrence of a small hit (10R normal small hit A or 10R normal small hit B), a V prize winning jackpot occurs, and the support mode B becomes the same as in (shi). In this way, from (1) onwards, the route will be the second bold line arrow in FIG. 73, and a total of 6000 balls will be obtained from the start of the first direct hit jackpot. If a win does not occur in this support mode B (7 times of time reduction) and the time reduction end condition is satisfied, the performance of the eternal long bonus ends, and if a win occurs in this support mode B, the performance of the eternal long bonus continues.

The transition of the game state as shown by the two bold line arrows in FIG.
If it remains at 000, end the eternal long bonus once at the (sa) stage, and after the support mode B of (shi) (su) and after the small hit state occurs at (se), the second You may restart the eternal long bonus from the story direction of the first episode (story 1).

In addition, we set the jackpots that occur twice regarding consecutive support mode A and support mode B as one set, and set the eternal long bonus effect corresponding to at least one set (total number of balls rolled out of 3000). Of these, only the first jackpot may be set as an eternal long bonus performance, and the second jackpot that shifts to support mode B may be set as an angel bonus performance as shown in FIG. That is, the eternal long bonus may not be treated as an exception, and the bonus performance may be changed based on FIG. 71 for each jackpot.

In addition, the jackpot fanfare (U) for a direct hit jackpot is made different from the small hit fanfare (ki) for a jackpot that is not a direct hit jackpot (namely, a small hit + a V prize winning jackpot). In addition, the performance during the fluctuating display that results in a direct hit jackpot and the performance during the fluctuating display that results in a jackpot that is not a direct hit jackpot (namely, a small hit + V prize winning jackpot) may be made different.

In addition, in the above, regarding the support mode A of (ka) and the support mode B of (su), the same small hit stop symbol (for example, 10R normal small hit A symbol) on the collective display device 50 and the same symbol type (for example, symbol type 3) However, the decorative stop symbols on the display device 41 are different depending on the support mode in which the small winning variation has started. Similarly, even with the same jackpot stop symbol on the collective display device 50, the decorative stop symbol on the display device 41 may be made different depending on the support mode in which the jackpot variation has started. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the decorative stop symbols on the display device 41 are also made the same for the same small hit stop symbols or the same jackpot stop symbols on the collective display device 50 is also possible.

[Actions and effects of the first embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a game control means (for example, a game control device 100) that can control the progress of a game (for example, a special figure fluctuation display game), and the game result is a special result (for example, a small hit or When a player wins a jackpot), a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a small win state or a jackpot state) can be generated. The game control means is capable of generating multiple types of specific game states (for example, time saving state, power supply support state) different from the special game state, and when the game in the specific game state has a special result, Type (e.g. support mode A, B
) It is possible to set the end of a specific gaming state at a timing according to the timing.

In such a gaming machine 10, the end timing of the specific gaming state, which differs depending on the type of specific gaming state, is used to determine the selection of the gaming state, thereby widening the range of game play and enriching the variation of the game. The interest in playing games can be improved. For example, even if the special results (e.g., small winning symbols) of a game in a specific gaming state (e.g., time saving state, general electricity support state) are of the same type (e.g., 10R normal small winning A), even if the special results (e.g., small winning symbols) in the special gaming state (e.g., small winning state) are the same (e.g., 10R normal small winning A), or jackpot)
A subsequent game state (for example, support modes A and B) can be selected based on the end timing of the specific game state which differs depending on the type of the specific game state, thereby widening the range of game properties and enriching the variations of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the game control means is capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information (for example, special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner, and is capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information (for example, special symbols) is displayed in a variable manner. When the display game has a special result, it is possible to set the end of the first specific gaming state at the end of the variation (or when the stop display starts), and the variable display game in the second specific gaming state (for example, support mode B) When the result is a special result, the end of the second specific gaming state is not set at the end of the variation.

In such a gaming machine 10, the end timing of a specific gaming state is varied depending on the type of the specific gaming state, depending on whether it is at the end of the variable or not, to suitably widen the range of game characteristics and increase the variation of games. Thus, the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the variable display game in the second specific gaming state (for example, support mode B) has a special result, the gaming control means controls the timing at the start of the special gaming state (or When the stop display ends), it is possible to set the end of the second specific gaming state (for example, support mode B).

In such a gaming machine 10, the end timing of the specific gaming state is varied before and after the stop display depending on the type of the specific gaming state, to suitably widen the range of game play and increase the variation of the game. The interest in playing games can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the game control means controls the special game when the variable display game in the first specific gaming state (for example, support mode A) becomes the first special result (direct jackpot result). The end of the first specific gaming state (for example, support mode A) is set at the start of the state, and the variable display game in the first specific gaming state (for example, support mode A) has a second special result (
If the result is a small hit (small hit result), the first specific gaming state (for example, support mode A) is activated at the end of the fluctuation.
Set the end of

In such a gaming machine 10, only when the variable display game in the first specific gaming state (for example, support mode A) results in a second special result (small winning result), the specific gaming state is changed according to the type of the specific gaming state. The end timing can be different. Therefore, the difference between the jackpot result and the small win result can be widened, and the range of game characteristics can be suitably widened and the variations of the game can be increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the game control means reduces the remaining number of games (time saving number) in the first specific gaming state (for example, support mode A) when the variation ends, and reduces the remaining number of games (time saving number) in the special gaming state. At the start (or at the end of the stop display), the remaining number of games (time saving number) in the second specific game state (for example, support mode B) is decreased.

In such a gaming machine 10, there is an end timing for ending a specific gaming state when a game in a specific gaming state has a special result (small win), and a specific gaming state (for example, support mode).
The timing for reducing the remaining number of games (time saving number) can be aligned. Therefore, the game control becomes simple and the capacity of the game control program can be reduced.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a game control means (for example, a game control device 100) that can control the progress of a game (for example, a special figure variable display game), and a performance that can execute a performance related to the game. The player is equipped with a control means (for example, a production control device 300), and can generate a special gaming state (for example, a small win state or a jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result (for example, a small win or a jackpot). It is. The game control means is capable of generating a first special gaming state (jackpot state) when the game results in a first special result (direct jackpot result), and when the game results in a second special result (small hit result). In addition, a second special game state (small winning state) can be generated. The performance control means controls a performance at the start of the first special game state (jackpot state) (a jackpot fanfare performance, a performance that displays the name of the jackpot bonus performance in text), and a second special game state (small win state). The performance at the start of the game (a fanfare performance for a small win, a performance that displays the name of a bonus performance for a small win in text) is made different.

In such a gaming machine 10, when the gaming value (number of acquired balls) obtained in the first special gaming state (jackpot state) and the second special gaming state (small winning state) is different, the first special gaming state ( The interest of the game can be improved by making the performance at the start of the larger game value (number of acquired balls) of the jackpot state (big win state) and the second special game state (small win state) more flashy.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the game control means can store a starting memory as a right to execute the game, and after the special game state, multiple types of specific game states each having a different number of consecutive games are created. (For example, support modes A and B) can be generated. First specific gaming state (
For example, a special gaming state (e.g., 10R normal small win A) may occur due to a game in support mode A), and a special gaming state (e.g., 10R normal small win A) may occur due to a game in a second specific gaming state (e.g., support mode B). It is possible to vary the type of specific gaming state (for example, support mode A or support mode B) that can occur after the special gaming state depending on the case. A special game state (for example, 10
When a normal small hit A, B) occurs, and after a specific gaming state (for example, during the remaining pending extinguishment mode), a special gaming state ( For example, the type of specific game state (for example, support mode A) that can be generated after the special game state is the same in the case where 10R normal small winnings A, B) occur.

In such a gaming machine 10, when a special gaming state (for example, 10R normal small win A) occurs due to a game in the second specific gaming state (for example, support mode B), the specific gaming state that can occur after the special gaming state is The type is set to be advantageous (for example, support mode A), and a special game state (for example, 10R normal small win A) is achieved by a game in the first specific game state (for example, support mode A).
) can be differentiated from cases where this occurs, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the game control means can generate multiple types of specific gaming states different from the special gaming state, and has a plurality of ending conditions (for example, time saving) for ending each specific gaming state. When any one of the termination conditions (termination conditions) is satisfied, each specific gaming state is terminated, and some termination conditions (for example, the condition (
iii)(iv)(v)) are the same and other termination conditions are different.

With such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to simplify the game control, expand the range of game features, increase the variations of the games, and improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a game control means that can display a game (for example, a special figure variable display game) on a first display means (for example, a special figure display of the collective display device 50), and a The second display means (for example, a decorative special figure variable display game) corresponding to the
For example, a performance control means that can be displayed on a display device 41) is provided, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player can be generated. The game control means can generate multiple types of specific game states different from the special game state. The game control means is
When the game in the first specific gaming state (for example, during support mode A) has a special result, and when the game in the second specific gaming state (for example, during support mode B) has a special result, the result of the game is Even if the special result (for example, 10R normal small win A symbol) displayed on the first display means (for example, the special figure display of the batch display device 50) is the same, the second display means (for example, the display device 41) displays the same result as the result of the decoration game. The decoration special results displayed are different (for example, "5, 5").
, 5'' and ``7, 7, 7'').

In such a gaming machine 10, the game value (for example, the number of time savings) that can be acquired when a game in the second specific gaming state (for example, during support mode B) has a special result, and the first specific gaming state (for example, during support mode A). If the game value (for example, the number of time reductions) that can be obtained when the game (middle) has a special result is different, the special result displayed on the first display means (for example, the special figure display of the batch display device 50) Even if it is the same special result, the second display means (for example, display device 41)
Since the decorative special results (for example, "5, 5, 5" or "7, 7, 7") displayed are different, it is possible to notify that the obtainable game values (for example, the number of times saved) are different. Therefore, the interest in the game is improved.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, it is also possible to replace the short time state with a variable probability state. For example, the production control device can execute some of the processing that the gaming control device is executing, or conversely, the gaming control device can execute some of the processing that the production control device is executing. . for example,
It is also possible to variously combine a plurality of embodiments and a plurality of modifications. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied not only to pachinko machines but also to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and content equivalent to the claims are included.

For example, when the above-described embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the game media used in the game are medals (coins) instead of game balls, and the number of prize balls is replaced with the number of medals to be paid out. The number of game media used is the number of inserted medals, which is the number of medals inserted into the slot machine. For slot machines, the ball payout rate (base) as performance information is
It is the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted into the slot machine, and the accessory ratio is the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out by various bonuses among the number of medals paid out in a predetermined period.

10 Game machine 25 Production button 30 Game board 32 Game area 34 Normal figure starting gate 36 1st starting prize opening (1st starting winning area)
37 Normal variable winning device (second starting winning area)
38 1st special variable winning device 39 2nd special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
86 Specific area (V winning opening)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Production control device (sub board)

Claims (1)

A game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means capable of executing a performance related to the game, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is provided. In gaming machines that can generate
The game control means is
a first special gaming state can occur if the game has a first special outcome;
a second special gaming state can occur if the game results in a second special outcome;
When the game in the normal gaming state reaches the first special result, the first special gaming state can be generated, and after the first special gaming state ends, a first specific gaming state can be generated,
When the game in the first specific gaming state reaches the second special result, the second special gaming state can be generated;
The performance control means is
A game characterized in that, as a performance in the first special gaming state, it is possible to display a combination of the obtainable gaming value in the first special gaming state and the obtainable gaming value in the second special gaming state. Machine.

Images